2026-05-30 01:19 @216.73.216.79 CrawledBy Mozilla/5.0 AppleWebKit/537.36 (KHTML, like Gecko; compatible; ClaudeBot/1.0; +claudebot@anthropic.com)
HG(1) Mercurial Manual HG(1) NAME hg - Mercurial source code management system SYNOPSIS hg command [option]... [argument]... DESCRIPTION The hg command provides a command line interface to the Mercurial system. COMMAND ELEMENTS files... indicates one or more filename or relative path filenames; see File Name Patterns for information on pattern matching path indicates a path on the local machine revision indicates a changeset which can be specified as a changeset revision number, a tag, or a unique substring of the changeset hash value repository path either the pathname of a local repository or the URI of a remote repository. OPTIONS -R,--repository <REPO> repository root directory or name of overlay bundle file --cwd <DIR> change working directory -y, --noninteractive do not prompt, automatically pick the first choice for all prompts -q, --quiet suppress output -v, --verbose enable additional output --color <TYPE> when to colorize (boolean, always, auto, never, or debug) --config <CONFIG[+]> set/override config option (use 'section.name=value') --debug enable debugging output --debugger start debugger --encoding <ENCODE> set the charset encoding (default: UTF-8) --encodingmode <MODE> set the charset encoding mode (default: strict) --traceback always print a traceback on exception --time time how long the command takes --profile print command execution profile --version output version information and exit -h, --help display help and exit --hidden consider hidden changesets --pager <TYPE> when to paginate (boolean, always, auto, or never) (default: auto) [+] marked option can be specified multiple times COMMANDS Repository creation clone make a copy of an existing repository: hg clone [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST] Create a copy of an existing repository in a new directory. If no destination directory name is specified, it defaults to the basename of the source. The location of the source is added to the new repository's .hg/hgrc file, as the default to be used for future pulls. Only local paths and ssh:// URLs are supported as destinations. For ssh:// destinations, no working directory or .hg/hgrc will be created on the remote side. If the source repository has a bookmark called '@' set, that revision will be checked out in the new repository by default. To check out a particular version, use -u/--update, or -U/--noupdate to create a clone with no working directory. To pull only a subset of changesets, specify one or more revisions identifiers with -r/--rev or branches with -b/--branch. The resulting clone will contain only the specified changesets and their ancestors. These options (or 'clone src#rev dest') imply --pull, even for local source repositories. In normal clone mode, the remote normalizes repository data into a common exchange format and the receiving end translates this data into its local storage format. --stream activates a different clone mode that essentially copies repository files from the remote with minimal data processing. This significantly reduces the CPU cost of a clone both remotely and lo‐ cally. However, it often increases the transferred data size by 30-40%. This can result in substantially faster clones where I/O throughput is plentiful, especially for larger reposi‐ tories. A side-effect of --stream clones is that storage settings and requirements on the re‐ mote are applied locally: a modern client may inherit legacy or inefficient storage used by the remote or a legacy Mercurial client may not be able to clone from a modern Mercurial re‐ mote. Note Specifying a tag will include the tagged changeset but not the changeset containing the tag. For efficiency, hardlinks are used for cloning whenever the source and destination are on the same filesystem (note this applies only to the repository data, not to the working direc‐ tory). Some filesystems, such as AFS, implement hardlinking incorrectly, but do not report errors. In these cases, use the --pull option to avoid hardlinking. Mercurial will update the working directory to the first applicable revision from this list: a. null if -U or the source repository has no changesets b. if -u . and the source repository is local, the first parent of the source repository's working directory c. the changeset specified with -u (if a branch name, this means the latest head of that branch) d. the changeset specified with -r e. the tipmost head specified with -b f. the tipmost head specified with the url#branch source syntax g. the revision marked with the '@' bookmark, if present h. the tipmost head of the default branch i. tip When cloning from servers that support it, Mercurial may fetch pre-generated data from a server-advertised URL or inline from the same stream. When this is done, hooks operating on incoming changesets and changegroups may fire more than once, once for each pre-generated bundle and as well as for any additional remaining data. In addition, if an error occurs, the repository may be rolled back to a partial clone. This behavior may change in future re‐ leases. See hg help -e clonebundles for more. Examples: • clone a remote repository to a new directory named hg/: hg clone https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/ • create a lightweight local clone: hg clone project/ project-feature/ • clone from an absolute path on an ssh server (note double-slash): hg clone ssh://user@server//home/projects/alpha/ • do a streaming clone while checking out a specified version: hg clone --stream http://server/repo -u 1.5 • create a repository without changesets after a particular revision: hg clone -r 04e544 experimental/ good/ • clone (and track) a particular named branch: hg clone https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/#stable See hg help urls for details on specifying URLs. Returns 0 on success. Options: -U, --noupdate the clone will include an empty working directory (only a repository) -u,--updaterev <REV> revision, tag, or branch to check out -r,--rev <REV[+]> do not clone everything, but include this changeset and its ancestors -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]> do not clone everything, but include this branch's changesets and their ancestors --pull use pull protocol to copy metadata --uncompressed an alias to --stream (DEPRECATED) --stream clone with minimal data processing -e,--ssh <CMD> specify ssh command to use --remotecmd <CMD> specify hg command to run on the remote side --insecure do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config) [+] marked option can be specified multiple times init create a new repository in the given directory: hg init [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [DEST] Initialize a new repository in the given directory. If the given directory does not exist, it will be created. If no directory is given, the current directory is used. It is possible to specify an ssh:// URL as the destination. See hg help urls for more infor‐ mation. Returns 0 on success. Options: -e,--ssh <CMD> specify ssh command to use --remotecmd <CMD> specify hg command to run on the remote side --insecure do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config) Remote repository management incoming show new changesets found in source: hg incoming [-p] [-n] [-M] [-f] [-r REV]... [--bundle FILENAME] [SOURCE] Show new changesets found in the specified path/URL or the default pull location. These are the changesets that would have been pulled by hg pull at the time you issued this command. See pull for valid source format details. With -B/--bookmarks, the result of bookmark comparison between local and remote repositories is displayed. With -v/--verbose, status is also displayed for each bookmark like below: BM1 01234567890a added BM2 1234567890ab advanced BM3 234567890abc diverged BM4 34567890abcd changed The action taken locally when pulling depends on the status of each bookmark: added pull will create it advanced pull will update it diverged pull will create a divergent bookmark changed result depends on remote changesets From the point of view of pulling behavior, bookmark existing only in the remote repository are treated as added, even if it is in fact locally deleted. For remote repository, using --bundle avoids downloading the changesets twice if the incoming is followed by a pull. Examples: • show incoming changes with patches and full description: hg incoming -vp • show incoming changes excluding merges, store a bundle: hg in -vpM --bundle incoming.hg hg pull incoming.hg • briefly list changes inside a bundle: hg in changes.hg -T "{desc|firstline}\n" Returns 0 if there are incoming changes, 1 otherwise. Options: -f, --force run even if remote repository is unrelated -n, --newest-first show newest record first --bundle <FILE> file to store the bundles into -r,--rev <REV[+]> a remote changeset intended to be added -B, --bookmarks compare bookmarks -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]> a specific branch you would like to pull -p, --patch show patch -g, --git use git extended diff format -l,--limit <NUM> limit number of changes displayed -M, --no-merges do not show merges --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes -G, --graph show the revision DAG --style <STYLE> display using template map file (DEPRECATED) -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template -e,--ssh <CMD> specify ssh command to use --remotecmd <CMD> specify hg command to run on the remote side --insecure do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config) -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories [+] marked option can be specified multiple times aliases: in outgoing show changesets not found in the destination: hg outgoing [-M] [-p] [-n] [-f] [-r REV]... [DEST]... Show changesets not found in the specified destination repository or the default push loca‐ tion. These are the changesets that would be pushed if a push was requested. See pull for details of valid destination formats. With -B/--bookmarks, the result of bookmark comparison between local and remote repositories is displayed. With -v/--verbose, status is also displayed for each bookmark like below: BM1 01234567890a added BM2 deleted BM3 234567890abc advanced BM4 34567890abcd diverged BM5 4567890abcde changed The action taken when pushing depends on the status of each bookmark: added push with -B will create it deleted push with -B will delete it advanced push will update it diverged push with -B will update it changed push with -B will update it From the point of view of pushing behavior, bookmarks existing only in the remote repository are treated as deleted, even if it is in fact added remotely. Returns 0 if there are outgoing changes, 1 otherwise. Options: -f, --force run even when the destination is unrelated -r,--rev <REV[+]> a changeset intended to be included in the destination -n, --newest-first show newest record first -B, --bookmarks compare bookmarks -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]> a specific branch you would like to push -p, --patch show patch -g, --git use git extended diff format -l,--limit <NUM> limit number of changes displayed -M, --no-merges do not show merges --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes -G, --graph show the revision DAG --style <STYLE> display using template map file (DEPRECATED) -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template -e,--ssh <CMD> specify ssh command to use --remotecmd <CMD> specify hg command to run on the remote side --insecure do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config) -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories [+] marked option can be specified multiple times aliases: out paths show aliases for remote repositories: hg paths [NAME] Show definition of symbolic path name NAME. If no name is given, show definition of all available names. Option -q/--quiet suppresses all output when searching for NAME and shows only the path names when listing all definitions. Path names are defined in the [paths] section of your configuration file and in /etc/mercu‐‐ rial/hgrc. If run inside a repository, .hg/hgrc is used, too. The path names default and default-push have a special meaning. When performing a push or pull operation, they are used as fallbacks if no location is specified on the command-line. When default-push is set, it will be used for push and default will be used for pull; other‐ wise default is used as the fallback for both. When cloning a repository, the clone source is written as default in .hg/hgrc. Note default and default-push apply to all inbound (e.g. hg incoming) and outbound (e.g. hg outgoing, hg email and hg bundle) operations. See hg help urls for more information. Template: The following keywords are supported. See also hg help templates. name String. Symbolic name of the path alias. pushurl String. URL for push operations. url String. URL or directory path for the other operations. Returns 0 on success. Options: -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template pull pull changes from the specified source: hg pull [-u] [-f] [-r REV]... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [SOURCE]... Pull changes from a remote repository to a local one. This finds all changes from the repository at the specified path or URL and adds them to a local repository (the current one unless -R is specified). By default, this does not update the copy of the project in the working directory. When cloning from servers that support it, Mercurial may fetch pre-generated data. When this is done, hooks operating on incoming changesets and changegroups may fire more than once, once for each pre-generated bundle and as well as for any additional remaining data. See hg help -e clonebundles for more. Use hg incoming if you want to see what would have been added by a pull at the time you is‐ sued this command. If you then decide to add those changes to the repository, you should use hg pull -r X where X is the last changeset listed by hg incoming. If SOURCE is omitted, the 'default' path will be used. See hg help urls for more informa‐ tion. If multiple sources are specified, they will be pulled sequentially as if the command was run multiple time. If --update is specify and the command will stop at the first failed --update. Specifying bookmark as . is equivalent to specifying the active bookmark's name. Returns 0 on success, 1 if an update had unresolved files. Options: -u, --update update to new branch head if new descendants were pulled -f, --force run even when remote repository is unrelated --confirm confirm pull before applying changes -r,--rev <REV[+]> a remote changeset intended to be added -B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK[+]> bookmark to pull -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]> a specific branch you would like to pull -e,--ssh <CMD> specify ssh command to use --remotecmd <CMD> specify hg command to run on the remote side --insecure do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config) [+] marked option can be specified multiple times push push changes to the specified destination: hg push [-f] [-r REV]... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [DEST]... Push changesets from the local repository to the specified destination. This operation is symmetrical to pull: it is identical to a pull in the destination reposi‐ tory from the current one. By default, push will not allow creation of new heads at the destination, since multiple heads would make it unclear which head to use. In this situation, it is recommended to pull and merge before pushing. Use --new-branch if you want to allow push to create a new named branch that is not present at the destination. This allows you to only create a new branch without forcing other changes. Note Extra care should be taken with the -f/--force option, which will push all new heads on all branches, an action which will almost always cause confusion for collaborators. If -r/--rev is used, the specified revision and all its ancestors will be pushed to the re‐ mote repository. If -B/--bookmark is used, the specified bookmarked revision, its ancestors, and the bookmark will be pushed to the remote repository. Specifying . is equivalent to specifying the active bookmark's name. Use the --all-bookmarks option for pushing all current bookmarks. Please see hg help urls for important details about ssh:// URLs. If DESTINATION is omitted, a default path will be used. When passed multiple destinations, push will process them one after the other, but stop should an error occur. The --pushvars option sends strings to the server that become environment variables prepended with HG_USERVAR_. For example, --pushvars ENABLE_FEATURE=true, provides the server side hooks with HG_USERVAR_ENABLE_FEATURE=true as part of their environment. pushvars can provide for user-overridable hooks as well as set debug levels. One example is having a hook that blocks commits containing conflict markers, but enables the user to over‐ ride the hook if the file is using conflict markers for testing purposes or the file format has strings that look like conflict markers. By default, servers will ignore --pushvars. To enable it add the following to your configura‐ tion file: [push] pushvars.server = true Returns 0 if push was successful, 1 if nothing to push. Options: -f, --force force push -r,--rev <REV[+]> a changeset intended to be included in the destination -B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK[+]> bookmark to push --all-bookmarks push all bookmarks (EXPERIMENTAL) -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]> a specific branch you would like to push --new-branch allow pushing a new branch --pushvars <VALUE[+]> variables that can be sent to server (ADVANCED) --publish push the changeset as public (EXPERIMENTAL) -e,--ssh <CMD> specify ssh command to use --remotecmd <CMD> specify hg command to run on the remote side --insecure do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config) [+] marked option can be specified multiple times serve start stand-alone webserver: hg serve [OPTION]... Start a local HTTP repository browser and pull server. You can use this for ad-hoc sharing and browsing of repositories. It is recommended to use a real web server to serve a reposi‐ tory for longer periods of time. Please note that the server does not implement access control. This means that, by default, anybody can read from the server and nobody can write to it by default. Set the web.al‐‐ low-push option to * to allow everybody to push to the server. You should use a real web server if you need to authenticate users. By default, the server logs accesses to stdout and errors to stderr. Use the -A/--accesslog and -E/--errorlog options to log to files. To have the server choose a free port number to listen on, specify a port number of 0; in this case, the server will print the port number it uses. Returns 0 on success. Options: -A,--accesslog <FILE> name of access log file to write to -d, --daemon run server in background --daemon-postexec <VALUE[+]> used internally by daemon mode -E,--errorlog <FILE> name of error log file to write to -p,--port <PORT> port to listen on (default: 8000) -a,--address <ADDR> address to listen on (default: all interfaces) --prefix <PREFIX> prefix path to serve from (default: server root) -n,--name <NAME> name to show in web pages (default: working directory) --web-conf <FILE> name of the hgweb config file (see 'hg help hgweb') --webdir-conf <FILE> name of the hgweb config file (DEPRECATED) --pid-file <FILE> name of file to write process ID to --stdio for remote clients (ADVANCED) --cmdserver <MODE> for remote clients (ADVANCED) -t,--templates <TEMPLATE> web templates to use --style <STYLE> template style to use -6, --ipv6 use IPv6 in addition to IPv4 --certificate <FILE> SSL certificate file --print-url start and print only the URL -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories [+] marked option can be specified multiple times Change creation commit commit the specified files or all outstanding changes: hg commit [OPTION]... [FILE]... Commit changes to the given files into the repository. Unlike a centralized SCM, this opera‐ tion is a local operation. See hg push for a way to actively distribute your changes. If a list of files is omitted, all changes reported by hg status will be committed. If you are committing the result of a merge, do not provide any filenames or -I/-X filters. If no commit message is specified, Mercurial starts your configured editor where you can en‐ ter a message. In case your commit fails, you will find a backup of your message in .hg/last-message.txt. The --close-branch flag can be used to mark the current branch head closed. When all heads of a branch are closed, the branch will be considered closed and no longer listed. The --amend flag can be used to amend the parent of the working directory with a new commit that contains the changes in the parent in addition to those currently reported by hg status, if there are any. The old commit is stored in a backup bundle in .hg/strip-backup (see hg help bundle and hg help unbundle on how to restore it). Message, user and date are taken from the amended commit unless specified. When a message isn't specified on the command line, the editor will open with the message of the amended commit. It is not possible to amend public changesets (see hg help phases) or changesets that have children. See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date. Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing changed. Examples: • commit all files ending in .py: hg commit --include "set:**.py" • commit all non-binary files: hg commit --exclude "set:binary()" • amend the current commit and set the date to now: hg commit --amend --date now Options: -A, --addremove mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing --close-branch mark a branch head as closed --amend amend the parent of the working directory -s, --secret use the secret phase for committing -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages --force-close-branch forcibly close branch from a non-head changeset (ADVANCED) -i, --interactive use interactive mode -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -l,--logfile <FILE> read commit message from file -d,--date <DATE> record the specified date as commit date -u,--user <USER> record the specified user as committer -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories [+] marked option can be specified multiple times aliases: ci Change manipulation abort abort an unfinished operation (EXPERIMENTAL): hg abort Aborts a multistep operation like graft, histedit, rebase, merge, and unshelve if they are in an unfinished state. use --dry-run/-n to dry run the command. Options: -n, --dry-run do not perform actions, just print output backout reverse effect of earlier changeset: hg backout [OPTION]... [-r] REV Prepare a new changeset with the effect of REV undone in the current working directory. If no conflicts were encountered, it will be committed immediately. If REV is the parent of the working directory, then this new changeset is committed automati‐ cally (unless --no-commit is specified). Note hg backout cannot be used to fix either an unwanted or incorrect merge. Examples: • Reverse the effect of the parent of the working directory. This backout will be committed immediately: hg backout -r . • Reverse the effect of previous bad revision 23: hg backout -r 23 • Reverse the effect of previous bad revision 23 and leave changes uncommitted: hg backout -r 23 --no-commit hg commit -m "Backout revision 23" By default, the pending changeset will have one parent, maintaining a linear history. With --merge, the pending changeset will instead have two parents: the old parent of the working directory and a new child of REV that simply undoes REV. Before version 1.7, the behavior without --merge was equivalent to specifying --merge fol‐ lowed by hg update --clean . to cancel the merge and leave the child of REV as a head to be merged separately. See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date. See hg help revert for a way to restore files to the state of another revision. Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing to backout or there are unresolved files. Options: --merge merge with old dirstate parent after backout --commit commit if no conflicts were encountered (DEPRECATED) --no-commit do not commit --parent <REV> parent to choose when backing out merge (DEPRECATED) -r,--rev <REV> revision to backout -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages -t,--tool <TOOL> specify merge tool -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -l,--logfile <FILE> read commit message from file -d,--date <DATE> record the specified date as commit date -u,--user <USER> record the specified user as committer [+] marked option can be specified multiple times continue resumes an interrupted operation (EXPERIMENTAL): hg continue Finishes a multistep operation like graft, histedit, rebase, merge, and unshelve if they are in an interrupted state. use --dry-run/-n to dry run the command. Options: -n, --dry-run do not perform actions, just print output graft copy changes from other branches onto the current branch: hg graft [OPTION]... [-r REV]... REV... This command uses Mercurial's merge logic to copy individual changes from other branches without merging branches in the history graph. This is sometimes known as 'backporting' or 'cherry-picking'. By default, graft will copy user, date, and description from the source changesets. Changesets that are ancestors of the current revision, that have already been grafted, or that are merges will be skipped. If --log is specified, log messages will have a comment appended of the form: (grafted from CHANGESETHASH) If --force is specified, revisions will be grafted even if they are already ancestors of, or have been grafted to, the destination. This is useful when the revisions have since been backed out. If a graft merge results in conflicts, the graft process is interrupted so that the current merge can be manually resolved. Once all conflicts are addressed, the graft process can be continued with the -c/--continue option. The -c/--continue option reapplies all the earlier options. The --base option exposes more of how graft internally uses merge with a custom base revi‐ sion. --base can be used to specify another ancestor than the first and only parent. The command: hg graft -r 345 --base 234 is thus pretty much the same as: hg diff --from 234 --to 345 | hg import but using merge to resolve conflicts and track moved files. The result of a merge can thus be backported as a single commit by specifying one of the merge parents as base, and thus effectively grafting the changes from the other side. It is also possible to collapse multiple changesets and clean up history by specifying an‐ other ancestor as base, much like rebase --collapse --keep. The commit message can be tweaked after the fact using commit --amend . For using non-ancestors as the base to backout changes, see the backout command and the hid‐ den --parent option. Examples: • copy a single change to the stable branch and edit its description: hg update stable hg graft --edit 9393 • graft a range of changesets with one exception, updating dates: hg graft -D "2085::2093 and not 2091" • continue a graft after resolving conflicts: hg graft -c • show the source of a grafted changeset: hg log --debug -r . • show revisions sorted by date: hg log -r "sort(all(), date)" • backport the result of a merge as a single commit: hg graft -r 123 --base 123^ • land a feature branch as one changeset: hg up -cr default hg graft -r featureX --base "ancestor('featureX', 'default')" See hg help revisions for more about specifying revisions. Returns 0 on successful completion, 1 if there are unresolved files. Options: -r,--rev <REV[+]> revisions to graft --base <REV> base revision when doing the graft merge (ADVANCED) -c, --continue resume interrupted graft --stop stop interrupted graft --abort abort interrupted graft -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages --log append graft info to log message --no-commit don't commit, just apply the changes in working directory -f, --force force graft -D, --currentdate record the current date as commit date -U, --currentuser record the current user as committer -d,--date <DATE> record the specified date as commit date -u,--user <USER> record the specified user as committer -t,--tool <TOOL> specify merge tool -n, --dry-run do not perform actions, just print output [+] marked option can be specified multiple times merge merge another revision into working directory: hg merge [-P] [[-r] REV] The current working directory is updated with all changes made in the requested revision since the last common predecessor revision. Files that changed between either parent are marked as changed for the next commit and a com‐ mit must be performed before any further updates to the repository are allowed. The next com‐ mit will have two parents. --tool can be used to specify the merge tool used for file merges. It overrides the HGMERGE environment variable and your configuration files. See hg help merge-tools for options. If no revision is specified, the working directory's parent is a head revision, and the cur‐ rent branch contains exactly one other head, the other head is merged with by default. Other‐ wise, an explicit revision with which to merge must be provided. See hg help resolve for information on handling file conflicts. To undo an uncommitted merge, use hg merge --abort which will check out a clean copy of the original merge parent, losing all changes. Returns 0 on success, 1 if there are unresolved files. Options: -f, --force force a merge including outstanding changes (DEPRECATED) -r,--rev <REV> revision to merge -P, --preview review revisions to merge (no merge is performed) --abort abort the ongoing merge -t,--tool <TOOL> specify merge tool Change organization bookmarks create a new bookmark or list existing bookmarks: hg bookmarks [OPTIONS]... [NAME]... Bookmarks are labels on changesets to help track lines of development. Bookmarks are unver‐ sioned and can be moved, renamed and deleted. Deleting or moving a bookmark has no effect on the associated changesets. Creating or updating to a bookmark causes it to be marked as 'active'. The active bookmark is indicated with a '*'. When a commit is made, the active bookmark will advance to the new commit. A plain hg update will also advance an active bookmark, if possible. Updating away from a bookmark will cause it to be deactivated. Bookmarks can be pushed and pulled between repositories (see hg help push and hg help pull). If a shared bookmark has diverged, a new 'divergent bookmark' of the form 'name@path' will be created. Using hg merge will resolve the divergence. Specifying bookmark as '.' to -m/-d/-l options is equivalent to specifying the active book‐ mark's name. A bookmark named '@' has the special property that hg clone will check it out by default if it exists. Template: The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template keywords and func‐ tions such as {bookmark}. See also hg help templates. active Boolean. True if the bookmark is active. Examples: • create an active bookmark for a new line of development: hg book new-feature • create an inactive bookmark as a place marker: hg book -i reviewed • create an inactive bookmark on another changeset: hg book -r .^ tested • rename bookmark turkey to dinner: hg book -m turkey dinner • move the '@' bookmark from another branch: hg book -f @ • print only the active bookmark name: hg book -ql . Options: -f, --force force -r,--rev <REV> revision for bookmark action -d, --delete delete a given bookmark -m,--rename <OLD> rename a given bookmark -i, --inactive mark a bookmark inactive -l, --list list existing bookmarks -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template aliases: bookmark branch set or show the current branch name: hg branch [-fC] [NAME] Note Branch names are permanent and global. Use hg bookmark to create a light-weight book‐ mark instead. See hg help glossary for more information about named branches and book‐ marks. With no argument, show the current branch name. With one argument, set the working directory branch name (the branch will not exist in the repository until the next commit). Standard practice recommends that primary development take place on the 'default' branch. Unless -f/--force is specified, branch will not let you set a branch name that already ex‐ ists. Use -C/--clean to reset the working directory branch to that of the parent of the working di‐ rectory, negating a previous branch change. Use the command hg update to switch to an existing branch. Use hg commit --close-branch to mark this branch head as closed. When all heads of a branch are closed, the branch will be considered closed. Returns 0 on success. Options: -f, --force set branch name even if it shadows an existing branch -C, --clean reset branch name to parent branch name -r,--rev <VALUE[+]> change branches of the given revs (EXPERIMENTAL) [+] marked option can be specified multiple times branches list repository named branches: hg branches [-c] List the repository's named branches, indicating which ones are inactive. If -c/--closed is specified, also list branches which have been marked closed (see hg commit --close-branch). Use the command hg update to switch to an existing branch. Template: The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template keywords and func‐ tions such as {branch}. See also hg help templates. active Boolean. True if the branch is active. closed Boolean. True if the branch is closed. current Boolean. True if it is the current branch. Returns 0. Options: -a, --active show only branches that have unmerged heads (DEPRECATED) -c, --closed show normal and closed branches -r,--rev <VALUE[+]> show branch name(s) of the given rev -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template [+] marked option can be specified multiple times phase set or show the current phase name: hg phase [-p|-d|-s] [-f] [-r] [REV...] With no argument, show the phase name of the current revision(s). With one of -p/--public, -d/--draft or -s/--secret, change the phase value of the specified revisions. Unless -f/--force is specified, hg phase won't move changesets from a lower phase to a higher phase. Phases are ordered as follows: public < draft < secret Returns 0 on success, 1 if some phases could not be changed. (For more information about the phases concept, see hg help phases.) Options: -p, --public set changeset phase to public -d, --draft set changeset phase to draft -s, --secret set changeset phase to secret -f, --force allow to move boundary backward -r,--rev <REV[+]> target revision [+] marked option can be specified multiple times tag add one or more tags for the current or given revision: hg tag [-f] [-l] [-m TEXT] [-d DATE] [-u USER] [-r REV] NAME... Name a particular revision using <name>. Tags are used to name particular revisions of the repository and are very useful to compare different revisions, to go back to significant earlier versions or to mark branch points as releases, etc. Changing an existing tag is normally disallowed; use -f/--force to override. If no revision is given, the parent of the working directory is used. To facilitate version control, distribution, and merging of tags, they are stored as a file named ".hgtags" which is managed similarly to other project files and can be hand-edited if necessary. This also means that tagging creates a new commit. The file ".hg/localtags" is used for local tags (not shared among repositories). Tag commits are usually made at the head of a branch. If the parent of the working directory is not a branch head, hg tag aborts; use -f/--force to force the tag commit to be based on a non-head changeset. See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date. Since tag names have priority over branch names during revision lookup, using an existing branch name as a tag name is discouraged. Returns 0 on success. Options: -f, --force force tag -l, --local make the tag local -r,--rev <REV> revision to tag --remove remove a tag -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -d,--date <DATE> record the specified date as commit date -u,--user <USER> record the specified user as committer tags list repository tags: hg tags This lists both regular and local tags. When the -v/--verbose switch is used, a third column "local" is printed for local tags. When the -q/--quiet switch is used, only the tag name is printed. Template: The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template keywords and func‐ tions such as {tag}. See also hg help templates. type String. local for local tags. Returns 0 on success. Options: -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template File content management annotate show changeset information by line for each file: hg annotate [-r REV] [-f] [-a] [-u] [-d] [-n] [-c] [-l] FILE... List changes in files, showing the revision id responsible for each line. This command is useful for discovering when a change was made and by whom. If you include --file, --user, or --date, the revision number is suppressed unless you also include --number. Without the -a/--text option, annotate will avoid processing files it detects as binary. With -a, annotate will annotate the file anyway, although the results will probably be neither useful nor desirable. Template: The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template keywords and func‐ tions. See also hg help templates. lines List of lines with annotation data. path String. Repository-absolute path of the specified file. And each entry of {lines} provides the following sub-keywords in addition to {date}, {node}, {rev}, {user}, etc. line String. Line content. lineno Integer. Line number at that revision. path String. Repository-absolute path of the file at that revision. See hg help templates.operators for the list expansion syntax. Returns 0 on success. Options: -r,--rev <REV> annotate the specified revision --follow follow copies/renames and list the filename (DEPRECATED) --no-follow don't follow copies and renames -a, --text treat all files as text -u, --user list the author (long with -v) -f, --file list the filename -d, --date list the date (short with -q) -n, --number list the revision number (default) -c, --changeset list the changeset -l, --line-number show line number at the first appearance --skip <REV[+]> revset to not display (EXPERIMENTAL) -w, --ignore-all-space ignore white space when comparing lines -b, --ignore-space-change ignore changes in the amount of white space -B, --ignore-blank-lines ignore changes whose lines are all blank -Z, --ignore-space-at-eol ignore changes in whitespace at EOL -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template [+] marked option can be specified multiple times aliases: blame cat output the current or given revision of files: hg cat [OPTION]... FILE... Print the specified files as they were at the given revision. If no revision is given, the parent of the working directory is used. Output may be to a file, in which case the name of the file is given using a template string. See hg help templates. In addition to the common template keywords, the following formatting rules are supported: %% literal "%" character %s basename of file being printed %d dirname of file being printed, or '.' if in repository root %p root-relative path name of file being printed %H changeset hash (40 hexadecimal digits) %R changeset revision number %h short-form changeset hash (12 hexadecimal digits) %r zero-padded changeset revision number %b basename of the exporting repository \ literal "" character Template: The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template keywords and func‐ tions. See also hg help templates. data String. File content. path String. Repository-absolute path of the file. Returns 0 on success. Options: -o,--output <FORMAT> print output to file with formatted name -r,--rev <REV> print the given revision --decode apply any matching decode filter -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template [+] marked option can be specified multiple times copy mark files as copied for the next commit: hg copy [OPTION]... (SOURCE... DEST | --forget DEST...) Mark dest as having copies of source files. If dest is a directory, copies are put in that directory. If dest is a file, the source must be a single file. By default, this command copies the contents of files as they exist in the working directory. If invoked with -A/--after, the operation is recorded, but no copying is performed. To undo marking a destination file as copied, use --forget. With that option, all given (po‐ sitional) arguments are unmarked as copies. The destination file(s) will be left in place (still tracked). Note that hg copy --forget behaves the same way as hg rename --forget. This command takes effect with the next commit by default. Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered. Options: --forget unmark a destination file as copied -A, --after record a copy that has already occurred --at-rev <REV> (un)mark copies in the given revision (EXPERIMENTAL) -f, --force forcibly copy over an existing managed file -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -n, --dry-run do not perform actions, just print output [+] marked option can be specified multiple times aliases: cp diff diff repository (or selected files): hg diff [OPTION]... ([-c REV] | [--from REV1] [--to REV2]) [FILE]... Show differences between revisions for the specified files. Differences between files are shown using the unified diff format. Note hg diff may generate unexpected results for merges, as it will default to comparing against the working directory's first parent changeset if no revisions are specified. By default, the working directory files are compared to its first parent. To see the differ‐ ences from another revision, use --from. To see the difference to another revision, use --to. For example, hg diff --from .^ will show the differences from the working copy's grandparent to the working copy, hg diff --to . will show the diff from the working copy to its parent (i.e. the reverse of the default), and hg diff --from 1.0 --to 1.2 will show the diff between those two revisions. Alternatively you can specify -c/--change with a revision to see the changes in that change‐ set relative to its first parent (i.e. hg diff -c 42 is equivalent to hg diff --from 42^ --to 42) Without the -a/--text option, diff will avoid generating diffs of files it detects as binary. With -a, diff will generate a diff anyway, probably with undesirable results. Use the -g/--git option to generate diffs in the git extended diff format. For more informa‐ tion, read hg help diffs. Examples: • compare a file in the current working directory to its parent: hg diff foo.c • compare two historical versions of a directory, with rename info: hg diff --git --from 1.0 --to 1.2 lib/ • get change stats relative to the last change on some date: hg diff --stat --from "date('may 2')" • diff all newly-added files that contain a keyword: hg diff "set:added() and grep(GNU)" • compare a revision and its parents: hg diff -c 9353 # compare against first parent hg diff --from 9353^ --to 9353 # same using revset syntax hg diff --from 9353^2 --to 9353 # compare against the second parent Returns 0 on success. Options: -r,--rev <REV[+]> revision (DEPRECATED) --from <REV1> revision to diff from --to <REV2> revision to diff to -c,--change <REV> change made by revision -a, --text treat all files as text -g, --git use git extended diff format (DEFAULT: diff.git) --binary generate binary diffs in git mode (default) --nodates omit dates from diff headers --noprefix omit a/ and b/ prefixes from filenames -p, --show-function show which function each change is in (DEFAULT: diff.showfunc) --reverse produce a diff that undoes the changes -w, --ignore-all-space ignore white space when comparing lines -b, --ignore-space-change ignore changes in the amount of white space -B, --ignore-blank-lines ignore changes whose lines are all blank -Z, --ignore-space-at-eol ignore changes in whitespace at EOL -U,--unified <NUM> number of lines of context to show --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes --root <DIR> produce diffs relative to subdirectory -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories [+] marked option can be specified multiple times grep search for a pattern in specified files: hg grep [--diff] [OPTION]... PATTERN [FILE]... Search the working directory or revision history for a regular expression in the specified files for the entire repository. By default, grep searches the repository files in the working directory and prints the files where it finds a match. To specify historical revisions instead of the working directory, use the --rev flag. To search instead historical revision differences that contains a change in match status ("-" for a match that becomes a non-match, or "+" for a non-match that becomes a match), use the --diff flag. PATTERN can be any Python (roughly Perl-compatible) regular expression. If no FILEs are specified and the --rev flag isn't supplied, all files in the working direc‐ tory are searched. When using the --rev flag and specifying FILEs, use the --follow argument to also follow the specified FILEs across renames and copies. Template: The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template keywords and func‐ tions. See also hg help templates. change String. Character denoting insertion + or removal -. Available if --diff is speci‐ fied. lineno Integer. Line number of the match. path String. Repository-absolute path of the file. texts List of text chunks. And each entry of {texts} provides the following sub-keywords. matched Boolean. True if the chunk matches the specified pattern. text String. Chunk content. See hg help templates.operators for the list expansion syntax. Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise. Options: -0, --print0 end fields with NUL --all an alias to --diff (DEPRECATED) --diff search revision differences for when the pattern was added or removed -a, --text treat all files as text -f, --follow follow changeset history, or file history across copies and renames -i, --ignore-case ignore case when matching -l, --files-with-matches print only filenames and revisions that match -n, --line-number print matching line numbers -r,--rev <REV[+]> search files changed within revision range --all-files include all files in the changeset while grepping (DEPRECATED) -u, --user list the author (long with -v) -d, --date list the date (short with -q) -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times Change navigation bisect subdivision search of changesets: hg bisect [-gbsr] [-U] [-c CMD] [REV] This command helps to find changesets which introduce problems. To use, mark the earliest changeset you know exhibits the problem as bad, then mark the latest changeset which is free from the problem as good. Bisect will update your working directory to a revision for testing (unless the -U/--noupdate option is specified). Once you have performed tests, mark the work‐ ing directory as good or bad, and bisect will either update to another candidate changeset or announce that it has found the bad revision. As a shortcut, you can also use the revision argument to mark a revision as good or bad with‐ out checking it out first. If you supply a command, it will be used for automatic bisection. The environment variable HG_NODE will contain the ID of the changeset being tested. The exit status of the command will be used to mark revisions as good or bad: status 0 means good, 125 means to skip the re‐ vision, 127 (command not found) will abort the bisection, and any other non-zero exit status means the revision is bad. Some examples: • start a bisection with known bad revision 34, and good revision 12: hg bisect --bad 34 hg bisect --good 12 • advance the current bisection by marking current revision as good or bad: hg bisect --good hg bisect --bad • mark the current revision, or a known revision, to be skipped (e.g. if that revision is not usable because of another issue): hg bisect --skip hg bisect --skip 23 • skip all revisions that do not touch directories foo or bar: hg bisect --skip "!( file('path:foo') & file('path:bar') )" • forget the current bisection: hg bisect --reset • use 'make && make tests' to automatically find the first broken revision: hg bisect --reset hg bisect --bad 34 hg bisect --good 12 hg bisect --command "make && make tests" • see all changesets whose states are already known in the current bisection: hg log -r "bisect(pruned)" • see the changeset currently being bisected (especially useful if running with -U/--noup‐ date): hg log -r "bisect(current)" • see all changesets that took part in the current bisection: hg log -r "bisect(range)" • you can even get a nice graph: hg log --graph -r "bisect(range)" See hg help revisions.bisect for more about the bisect() predicate. Returns 0 on success. Options: -r, --reset reset bisect state -g, --good mark changeset good -b, --bad mark changeset bad -s, --skip skip testing changeset -e, --extend extend the bisect range -c,--command <CMD> use command to check changeset state -U, --noupdate do not update to target heads show branch heads: hg heads [-ct] [-r STARTREV] [REV]... With no arguments, show all open branch heads in the repository. Branch heads are changesets that have no descendants on the same branch. They are where development generally takes place and are the usual targets for update and merge operations. If one or more REVs are given, only open branch heads on the branches associated with the specified changesets are shown. This means that you can use hg heads . to see the heads on the currently checked-out branch. If -c/--closed is specified, also show branch heads marked closed (see hg commit --close-branch). If STARTREV is specified, only those heads that are descendants of STARTREV will be dis‐ played. If -t/--topo is specified, named branch mechanics will be ignored and only topological heads (changesets with no children) will be shown. Returns 0 if matching heads are found, 1 if not. Options: -r,--rev <STARTREV> show only heads which are descendants of STARTREV -t, --topo show topological heads only -a, --active show active branchheads only (DEPRECATED) -c, --closed show normal and closed branch heads --style <STYLE> display using template map file (DEPRECATED) -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template identify identify the working directory or specified revision: hg identify [-nibtB] [-r REV] [SOURCE] Print a summary identifying the repository state at REV using one or two parent hash identi‐ fiers, followed by a "+" if the working directory has uncommitted changes, the branch name (if not default), a list of tags, and a list of bookmarks. When REV is not given, print a summary of the current state of the repository including the working directory. Specify -r. to get information of the working directory parent without scanning uncommitted changes. Specifying a path to a repository root or Mercurial bundle will cause lookup to operate on that repository/bundle. Template: The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template keywords and func‐ tions. See also hg help templates. dirty String. Character + denoting if the working directory has uncommitted changes. id String. One or two nodes, optionally followed by +. parents List of strings. Parent nodes of the changeset. Examples: • generate a build identifier for the working directory: hg id --id > build-id.dat • find the revision corresponding to a tag: hg id -n -r 1.3 • check the most recent revision of a remote repository: hg id -r tip https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/ See hg log for generating more information about specific revisions, including full hash identifiers. Returns 0 if successful. Options: -r,--rev <REV> identify the specified revision -n, --num show local revision number -i, --id show global revision id -b, --branch show branch -t, --tags show tags -B, --bookmarks show bookmarks -e,--ssh <CMD> specify ssh command to use --remotecmd <CMD> specify hg command to run on the remote side --insecure do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config) -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template aliases: id log show revision history of entire repository or files: hg log [OPTION]... [FILE] Print the revision history of the specified files or the entire project. If no revision range is specified, the default is tip:0 unless --follow is set. File history is shown without following rename or copy history of files. Use -f/--follow with a filename to follow history across renames and copies. --follow without a filename will only show ancestors of the starting revisions. The starting revisions can be specified by -r/--rev, which default to the working directory parent. By default this command prints revision number and changeset id, tags, non-trivial parents, user, date and time, and a summary for each commit. When the -v/--verbose switch is used, the list of changed files and full commit message are shown. With --graph the revisions are shown as an ASCII art DAG with the most recent changeset at the top. 'o' is a changeset, '@' is a working directory parent, '%' is a changeset involved in an unresolved merge conflict, '_' closes a branch, 'x' is obsolete, '*' is unstable, and '+' represents a fork where the changeset from the lines below is a parent of the 'o' merge on the same line. Paths in the DAG are represented with '|', '/' and so forth. ':' in place of a '|' indicates one or more revisions in a path are omitted. Use -L/--line-range FILE,M:N options to follow the history of lines from M to N in FILE. With -p/--patch only diff hunks affecting specified line range will be shown. This option requires --follow; it can be specified multiple times. Currently, this option is not compatible with --graph. This option is experimental. Note hg log --patch may generate unexpected diff output for merge changesets, as it will only compare the merge changeset against its first parent. Also, only files different from BOTH parents will appear in files:. Note For performance reasons, hg log FILE may omit duplicate changes made on branches and will not show removals or mode changes. To see all such changes, use the --removed switch. Note The history resulting from -L/--line-range options depends on diff options; for in‐ stance if white-spaces are ignored, respective changes with only white-spaces in spec‐ ified line range will not be listed. Some examples: • changesets with full descriptions and file lists: hg log -v • changesets ancestral to the working directory: hg log -f • last 10 commits on the current branch: hg log -l 10 -b . • changesets showing all modifications of a file, including removals: hg log --removed file.c • all changesets that touch a directory, with diffs, excluding merges: hg log -Mp lib/ • all revision numbers that match a keyword: hg log -k bug --template "{rev}\n" • the full hash identifier of the working directory parent: hg log -r . --template "{node}\n" • list available log templates: hg log -T list • check if a given changeset is included in a tagged release: hg log -r "a21ccf and ancestor(1.9)" • find all changesets by some user in a date range: hg log -k alice -d "may 2008 to jul 2008" • summary of all changesets after the last tag: hg log -r "last(tagged())::" --template "{desc|firstline}\n" • changesets touching lines 13 to 23 for file.c: hg log -L file.c,13:23 • changesets touching lines 13 to 23 for file.c and lines 2 to 6 of main.c with patch: hg log -L file.c,13:23 -L main.c,2:6 -p See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date. See hg help revisions for more about specifying and ordering revisions. See hg help templates for more about pre-packaged styles and specifying custom templates. The default template used by the log command can be customized via the command-templates.log con‐ figuration setting. Returns 0 on success. Options: -f, --follow follow changeset history, or file history across copies and renames --follow-first only follow the first parent of merge changesets (DEPRECATED) -d,--date <DATE> show revisions matching date spec -C, --copies show copied files -k,--keyword <TEXT[+]> do case-insensitive search for a given text -r,--rev <REV[+]> revisions to select or follow from -L,--line-range <FILE,RANGE[+]> follow line range of specified file (EXPERIMENTAL) --removed include revisions where files were removed -m, --only-merges show only merges (DEPRECATED) (use -r "merge()" instead) -u,--user <USER[+]> revisions committed by user --only-branch <BRANCH[+]> show only changesets within the given named branch (DEPRECATED) -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]> show changesets within the given named branch -B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK[+]> show changesets within the given bookmark -P,--prune <REV[+]> do not display revision or any of its ancestors -p, --patch show patch -g, --git use git extended diff format -l,--limit <NUM> limit number of changes displayed -M, --no-merges do not show merges --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes -G, --graph show the revision DAG --style <STYLE> display using template map file (DEPRECATED) -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times aliases: history parents show the parents of the working directory or revision (DEPRECATED): hg parents [-r REV] [FILE] Print the working directory's parent revisions. If a revision is given via -r/--rev, the par‐ ent of that revision will be printed. If a file argument is given, the revision in which the file was last changed (before the working directory revision or the argument to --rev if given) is printed. This command is equivalent to: hg log -r "p1()+p2()" or hg log -r "p1(REV)+p2(REV)" or hg log -r "max(::p1() and file(FILE))+max(::p2() and file(FILE))" or hg log -r "max(::p1(REV) and file(FILE))+max(::p2(REV) and file(FILE))" See hg summary and hg help revsets for related information. Returns 0 on success. Options: -r,--rev <REV> show parents of the specified revision --style <STYLE> display using template map file (DEPRECATED) -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template tip show the tip revision (DEPRECATED): hg tip [-p] [-g] The tip revision (usually just called the tip) is the changeset most recently added to the repository (and therefore the most recently changed head). If you have just made a commit, that commit will be the tip. If you have just pulled changes from another repository, the tip of that repository becomes the current tip. The "tip" tag is special and cannot be renamed or assigned to a different changeset. This command is deprecated, please use hg heads instead. Returns 0 on success. Options: -p, --patch show patch -g, --git use git extended diff format --style <STYLE> display using template map file (DEPRECATED) -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template Working directory management add add the specified files on the next commit: hg add [OPTION]... [FILE]... Schedule files to be version controlled and added to the repository. The files will be added to the repository at the next commit. To undo an add before that, see hg forget. If no names are given, add all files to the repository (except files matching .hgignore). Examples: • New (unknown) files are added automatically by hg add: $ ls foo.c $ hg status ? foo.c $ hg add adding foo.c $ hg status A foo.c • Specific files to be added can be specified: $ ls bar.c foo.c $ hg status ? bar.c ? foo.c $ hg add bar.c $ hg status A bar.c ? foo.c Returns 0 if all files are successfully added. Options: -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories -n, --dry-run do not perform actions, just print output [+] marked option can be specified multiple times addremove add all new files, delete all missing files: hg addremove [OPTION]... [FILE]... Add all new files and remove all missing files from the repository. Unless names are given, new files are ignored if they match any of the patterns in .hgignore. As with add, these changes take effect at the next commit. Use the -s/--similarity option to detect renamed files. This option takes a percentage be‐ tween 0 (disabled) and 100 (files must be identical) as its parameter. With a parameter greater than 0, this compares every removed file with every added file and records those sim‐ ilar enough as renames. Detecting renamed files this way can be expensive. After using this option, hg status -C can be used to check which files were identified as moved or renamed. If not specified, -s/--similarity defaults to 100 and only renames of identical files are de‐ tected. Examples: • A number of files (bar.c and foo.c) are new, while foobar.c has been removed (without using hg remove) from the repository: $ ls bar.c foo.c $ hg status ! foobar.c ? bar.c ? foo.c $ hg addremove adding bar.c adding foo.c removing foobar.c $ hg status A bar.c A foo.c R foobar.c • A file foobar.c was moved to foo.c without using hg rename. Afterwards, it was edited slightly: $ ls foo.c $ hg status ! foobar.c ? foo.c $ hg addremove --similarity 90 removing foobar.c adding foo.c recording removal of foobar.c as rename to foo.c (94% similar) $ hg status -C A foo.c foobar.c R foobar.c Returns 0 if all files are successfully added. Options: -s,--similarity <SIMILARITY> guess renamed files by similarity (0<=s<=100) -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -n, --dry-run do not perform actions, just print output [+] marked option can be specified multiple times files list tracked files: hg files [OPTION]... [FILE]... Print files under Mercurial control in the working directory or specified revision for given files (excluding removed files). Files can be specified as filenames or filesets. If no files are given to match, this command prints the names of all files under Mercurial control. Template: The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template keywords and func‐ tions. See also hg help templates. flags String. Character denoting file's symlink and executable bits. path String. Repository-absolute path of the file. size Integer. Size of the file in bytes. Examples: • list all files under the current directory: hg files . • shows sizes and flags for current revision: hg files -vr . • list all files named README: hg files -I "**/README" • list all binary files: hg files "set:binary()" • find files containing a regular expression: hg files "set:grep('bob')" • search tracked file contents with xargs and grep: hg files -0 | xargs -0 grep foo See hg help patterns and hg help filesets for more information on specifying file patterns. Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise. Options: -r,--rev <REV> search the repository as it is in REV -0, --print0 end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories [+] marked option can be specified multiple times forget forget the specified files on the next commit: hg forget [OPTION]... FILE... Mark the specified files so they will no longer be tracked after the next commit. This only removes files from the current branch, not from the entire project history, and it does not delete them from the working directory. To delete the file from the working directory, see hg remove. To undo a forget before the next commit, see hg add. Examples: • forget newly-added binary files: hg forget "set:added() and binary()" • forget files that would be excluded by .hgignore: hg forget "set:hgignore()" Returns 0 on success. Options: -i, --interactive use interactive mode -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -n, --dry-run do not perform actions, just print output [+] marked option can be specified multiple times locate locate files matching specific patterns (DEPRECATED): hg locate [OPTION]... [PATTERN]... Print files under Mercurial control in the working directory whose names match the given pat‐ terns. By default, this command searches all directories in the working directory. To search just the current directory and its subdirectories, use "--include .". If no patterns are given to match, this command prints the names of all files under Mercurial control in the working directory. If you want to feed the output of this command into the "xargs" command, use the -0 option to both this command and "xargs". This will avoid the problem of "xargs" treating single file‐ names that contain whitespace as multiple filenames. See hg help files for a more versatile command. Returns 0 if a match is found, 1 otherwise. Options: -r,--rev <REV> search the repository as it is in REV -0, --print0 end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs -f, --fullpath print complete paths from the filesystem root -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times purge removes files not tracked by Mercurial: hg purge [OPTION]... [DIR]... Delete files not known to Mercurial. This is useful to test local and uncommitted changes in an otherwise-clean source tree. This means that purge will delete the following by default: • Unknown files: files marked with "?" by hg status • Empty directories: in fact Mercurial ignores directories unless they contain files under source control management But it will leave untouched: • Modified and unmodified tracked files • Ignored files (unless -i or --all is specified) • New files added to the repository (with hg add) The --files and --dirs options can be used to direct purge to delete only files, only direc‐ tories, or both. If neither option is given, both will be deleted. If directories are given on the command line, only files in these directories are considered. Be careful with purge, as you could irreversibly delete some files you forgot to add to the repository. If you only want to print the list of files that this program would delete, use the --print option. Options: -a, --abort-on-err abort if an error occurs --all purge ignored files too -i, --ignored purge only ignored files --dirs purge empty directories --files purge files -p, --print print filenames instead of deleting them -0, --print0 end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs (implies -p/--print) --confirm ask before permanently deleting files -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times aliases: clean remove remove the specified files on the next commit: hg remove [OPTION]... FILE... Schedule the indicated files for removal from the current branch. This command schedules the files to be removed at the next commit. To undo a remove before that, see hg revert. To undo added files, see hg forget. -A/--after can be used to remove only files that have already been deleted, -f/--force can be used to force deletion, and -Af can be used to remove files from the next revision without deleting them from the working directory. The following table details the behavior of remove for different file states (columns) and option combinations (rows). The file states are Added [A], Clean [C], Modified [M] and Miss‐ ing [!] (as reported by hg status). The actions are Warn, Remove (from branch) and Delete (from disk): ┌──────────┬───┬────┬────┬───┐ │opt/state │ A │ C │ M │ ! │ ├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤ │none │ W │ RD │ W │ R │ ├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤ │-f │ R │ RD │ RD │ R │ ├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤ │-A │ W │ W │ W │ R │ ├──────────┼───┼────┼────┼───┤ │-Af │ R │ R │ R │ R │ └──────────┴───┴────┴────┴───┘ Note hg remove never deletes files in Added [A] state from the working directory, not even if --force is specified. Returns 0 on success, 1 if any warnings encountered. Options: -A, --after record delete for missing files -f, --force forget added files, delete modified files -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -n, --dry-run do not perform actions, just print output [+] marked option can be specified multiple times aliases: rm rename rename files; equivalent of copy + remove: hg rename [OPTION]... SOURCE... DEST Mark dest as copies of sources; mark sources for deletion. If dest is a directory, copies are put in that directory. If dest is a file, there can only be one source. By default, this command copies the contents of files as they exist in the working directory. If invoked with -A/--after, the operation is recorded, but no copying is performed. To undo marking a destination file as renamed, use --forget. With that option, all given (po‐ sitional) arguments are unmarked as renames. The destination file(s) will be left in place (still tracked). The source file(s) will not be restored. Note that hg rename --forget be‐ haves the same way as hg copy --forget. This command takes effect with the next commit by default. Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered. Options: --forget unmark a destination file as renamed -A, --after record a rename that has already occurred --at-rev <REV> (un)mark renames in the given revision (EXPERIMENTAL) -f, --force forcibly move over an existing managed file -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -n, --dry-run do not perform actions, just print output [+] marked option can be specified multiple times aliases: move mv resolve redo merges or set/view the merge status of files: hg resolve [OPTION]... [FILE]... Merges with unresolved conflicts are often the result of non-interactive merging using the internal:merge configuration setting, or a command-line merge tool like diff3. The resolve command is used to manage the files involved in a merge, after hg merge has been run, and be‐ fore hg commit is run (i.e. the working directory must have two parents). See hg help merge-tools for information on configuring merge tools. The resolve command can be used in the following ways: • hg resolve [--re-merge] [--tool TOOL] FILE...: attempt to re-merge the specified files, discarding any previous merge attempts. Re-merging is not performed for files already marked as resolved. Use --all/-a to select all unresolved files. --tool can be used to specify the merge tool used for the given files. It overrides the HGMERGE environment vari‐ able and your configuration files. Previous file contents are saved with a .orig suffix. • hg resolve -m [FILE]: mark a file as having been resolved (e.g. after having manually fixed-up the files). The default is to mark all unresolved files. • hg resolve -u [FILE]...: mark a file as unresolved. The default is to mark all resolved files. • hg resolve -l: list files which had or still have conflicts. In the printed list, U = un‐ resolved and R = resolved. You can use set:unresolved() or set:resolved() to filter the list. See hg help filesets for details. Note Mercurial will not let you commit files with unresolved merge conflicts. You must use hg resolve -m ... before you can commit after a conflicting merge. Template: The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template keywords and func‐ tions. See also hg help templates. mergestatus String. Character denoting merge conflicts, U or R. path String. Repository-absolute path of the file. Returns 0 on success, 1 if any files fail a resolve attempt. Options: -a, --all select all unresolved files -l, --list list state of files needing merge -m, --mark mark files as resolved -u, --unmark mark files as unresolved -n, --no-status hide status prefix --re-merge re-merge files -t,--tool <TOOL> specify merge tool -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template [+] marked option can be specified multiple times revert restore files to their checkout state: hg revert [OPTION]... [-r REV] [NAME]... Note To check out earlier revisions, you should use hg update REV. To cancel an uncommit‐ ted merge (and lose your changes), use hg merge --abort. With no revision specified, revert the specified files or directories to the contents they had in the parent of the working directory. This restores the contents of files to an unmod‐ ified state and unschedules adds, removes, copies, and renames. If the working directory has two parents, you must explicitly specify a revision. Using the -r/--rev or -d/--date options, revert the given files or directories to their states as of a specific revision. Because revert does not change the working directory par‐ ents, this will cause these files to appear modified. This can be helpful to "back out" some or all of an earlier change. See hg backout for a related method. Modified files are saved with a .orig suffix before reverting. To disable these backups, use --no-backup. It is possible to store the backup files in a custom directory relative to the root of the repository by setting the ui.origbackuppath configuration option. See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date. See hg help backout for a way to reverse the effect of an earlier changeset. Returns 0 on success. Options: -a, --all revert all changes when no arguments given -d,--date <DATE> tipmost revision matching date -r,--rev <REV> revert to the specified revision -C, --no-backup do not save backup copies of files -i, --interactive interactively select the changes -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -n, --dry-run do not perform actions, just print output [+] marked option can be specified multiple times root print the root (top) of the current working directory: hg root Print the root directory of the current repository. Template: The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template keywords and func‐ tions. See also hg help templates. hgpath String. Path to the .hg directory. storepath String. Path to the directory holding versioned data. Returns 0 on success. Options: -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template shelve save and set aside changes from the working directory: hg shelve [OPTION]... [FILE]... Shelving takes files that "hg status" reports as not clean, saves the modifications to a bun‐ dle (a shelved change), and reverts the files so that their state in the working directory becomes clean. To restore these changes to the working directory, using "hg unshelve"; this will work even if you switch to a different commit. When no files are specified, "hg shelve" saves all not-clean files. If specific files or di‐ rectories are named, only changes to those files are shelved. In bare shelve (when no files are specified, without interactive, include and exclude op‐ tion), shelving remembers information if the working directory was on newly created branch, in other words working directory was on different branch than its first parent. In this situ‐ ation unshelving restores branch information to the working directory. Each shelved change has a name that makes it easier to find later. The name of a shelved change defaults to being based on the active bookmark, or if there is no active bookmark, the current named branch. To specify a different name, use --name. To see a list of existing shelved changes, use the --list option. For each shelved change, this will print its name, age, and description; use --patch or --stat for more details. To delete specific shelved changes, use --delete. To delete all shelved changes, use --cleanup. Options: -A, --addremove mark new/missing files as added/removed before shelving -u, --unknown store unknown files in the shelve --cleanup delete all shelved changes --date <DATE> shelve with the specified commit date -d, --delete delete the named shelved change(s) -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages -k, --keep shelve, but keep changes in the working directory -l, --list list current shelves -m,--message <TEXT> use text as shelve message -n,--name <NAME> use the given name for the shelved commit -p, --patch output patches for changes (provide the names of the shelved changes as positional ar‐ guments) -i, --interactive interactive mode --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes (provide the names of the shelved changes as positional arguments) -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times status show changed files in the working directory: hg status [OPTION]... [FILE]... Show status of files in the repository. If names are given, only files that match are shown. Files that are clean or ignored or the source of a copy/move operation, are not listed unless -c/--clean, -i/--ignored, -C/--copies or -A/--all are given. Unless options described with "show only ..." are given, the options -mardu are used. Option -q/--quiet hides untracked (unknown and ignored) files unless explicitly requested with -u/--unknown or -i/--ignored. Note hg status may appear to disagree with diff if permissions have changed or a merge has occurred. The standard diff format does not report permission changes and diff only reports changes relative to one merge parent. If one revision is given, it is used as the base revision. If two revisions are given, the differences between them are shown. The --change option can also be used as a shortcut to list the changed files of a revision from its first parent. The codes used to show the status of files are: M = modified A = added R = removed C = clean ! = missing (deleted by non-hg command, but still tracked) ? = not tracked I = ignored = origin of the previous file (with --copies) The -t/--terse option abbreviates the output by showing only the directory name if all the files in it share the same status. The option takes an argument indicating the statuses to abbreviate: 'm' for 'modified', 'a' for 'added', 'r' for 'removed', 'd' for 'deleted', 'u' for 'unknown', 'i' for 'ignored' and 'c' for clean. It abbreviates only those statuses which are passed. Note that clean and ignored files are not displayed with '--terse ic' unless the -c/--clean and -i/--ignored options are also used. The -v/--verbose option shows information when the repository is in an unfinished merge, shelve, rebase state etc. You can have this behavior turned on by default by enabling the commands.status.verbose option. You can skip displaying some of these states by setting commands.status.skipstates to one or more of: 'bisect', 'graft', 'histedit', 'merge', 'rebase', or 'unshelve'. Template: The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template keywords and func‐ tions. See also hg help templates. path String. Repository-absolute path of the file. source String. Repository-absolute path of the file originated from. Available if --copies is specified. status String. Character denoting file's status. Examples: • show changes in the working directory relative to a changeset: hg status --rev 9353 • show changes in the working directory relative to the current directory (see hg help pat‐‐ terns for more information): hg status re: • show all changes including copies in an existing changeset: hg status --copies --change 9353 • get a NUL separated list of added files, suitable for xargs: hg status -an0 • show more information about the repository status, abbreviating added, removed, modified, deleted, and untracked paths: hg status -v -t mardu Returns 0 on success. Options: -A, --all show status of all files -m, --modified show only modified files -a, --added show only added files -r, --removed show only removed files -d, --deleted show only missing files -c, --clean show only files without changes -u, --unknown show only unknown (not tracked) files -i, --ignored show only ignored files -n, --no-status hide status prefix -t,--terse <VALUE> show the terse output (EXPERIMENTAL) (default: nothing) -C, --copies show source of copied files (DEFAULT: ui.statuscopies) -0, --print0 end filenames with NUL, for use with xargs --rev <REV[+]> show difference from revision --change <REV> list the changed files of a revision -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template [+] marked option can be specified multiple times aliases: st summary summarize working directory state: hg summary [--remote] This generates a brief summary of the working directory state, including parents, branch, commit status, phase and available updates. With the --remote option, this will check the default paths for incoming and outgoing changes. This can be time-consuming. Returns 0 on success. Options: --remote check for push and pull aliases: sum unshelve restore a shelved change to the working directory: hg unshelve [OPTION]... [[-n] SHELVED] This command accepts an optional name of a shelved change to restore. If none is given, the most recent shelved change is used. If a shelved change is applied successfully, the bundle that contains the shelved changes is moved to a backup location (.hg/shelve-backup). Since you can restore a shelved change on top of an arbitrary commit, it is possible that un‐ shelving will result in a conflict between your changes and the commits you are unshelving onto. If this occurs, you must resolve the conflict, then use --continue to complete the un‐ shelve operation. (The bundle will not be moved until you successfully complete the un‐ shelve.) (Alternatively, you can use --abort to abandon an unshelve that causes a conflict. This re‐ verts the unshelved changes, and leaves the bundle in place.) If bare shelved change (without interactive, include and exclude option) was done on newly created branch it would restore branch information to the working directory. After a successful unshelve, the shelved changes are stored in a backup directory. Only the N most recent backups are kept. N defaults to 10 but can be overridden using the shelve.maxbackups configuration option. Timestamp in seconds is used to decide order of backups. More than maxbackups backups are kept, if same timestamp prevents from deciding exact order of them, for safety. Selected changes can be unshelved with --interactive flag. The working directory is updated with the selected changes, and only the unselected changes remain shelved. Note: The whole shelve is applied to working directory first before running interactively. So, this will bring up all the conflicts between working directory and the shelve, irrespective of which changes will be unshelved. Options: -a, --abort abort an incomplete unshelve operation -c, --continue continue an incomplete unshelve operation -i, --interactive use interactive mode (EXPERIMENTAL) -k, --keep keep shelve after unshelving -n,--name <NAME> restore shelved change with given name -t,--tool <VALUE> specify merge tool --date <DATE> set date for temporary commits (DEPRECATED) update update working directory (or switch revisions): hg update [-C|-c|-m] [-d DATE] [[-r] REV] Update the repository's working directory to the specified changeset. If no changeset is specified, update to the tip of the current named branch and move the active bookmark (see hg help bookmarks). Update sets the working directory's parent revision to the specified changeset (see hg help parents). If the changeset is not a descendant or ancestor of the working directory's parent and there are uncommitted changes, the update is aborted. With the -c/--check option, the working di‐ rectory is checked for uncommitted changes; if none are found, the working directory is up‐ dated to the specified changeset. The -C/--clean, -c/--check, and -m/--merge options control what happens if the working direc‐ tory contains uncommitted changes. At most of one of them can be specified. 1. If no option is specified, and if the requested changeset is an ancestor or descendant of the working directory's parent, the uncommitted changes are merged into the requested changeset and the merged result is left uncommitted. If the requested changeset is not an ancestor or descendant (that is, it is on another branch), the update is aborted and the uncommitted changes are preserved. 2. With the -m/--merge option, the update is allowed even if the requested changeset is not an ancestor or descendant of the working directory's parent. 3. With the -c/--check option, the update is aborted and the uncommitted changes are pre‐ served. 4. With the -C/--clean option, uncommitted changes are discarded and the working directory is updated to the requested changeset. To cancel an uncommitted merge (and lose your changes), use hg merge --abort. Use null as the changeset to remove the working directory (like hg clone -U). If you want to revert just one file to an older revision, use hg revert [-r REV] NAME. See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date. Returns 0 on success, 1 if there are unresolved files. Options: -C, --clean discard uncommitted changes (no backup) -c, --check require clean working directory -m, --merge merge uncommitted changes -d,--date <DATE> tipmost revision matching date -r,--rev <REV> revision -t,--tool <TOOL> specify merge tool aliases: up checkout co Change import/export archive create an unversioned archive of a repository revision: hg archive [OPTION]... DEST By default, the revision used is the parent of the working directory; use -r/--rev to specify a different revision. The archive type is automatically detected based on file extension (to override, use -t/--type). Examples: • create a zip file containing the 1.0 release: hg archive -r 1.0 project-1.0.zip • create a tarball excluding .hg files: hg archive project.tar.gz -X ".hg*" Valid types are: files a directory full of files (default) tar tar archive, uncompressed tbz2 tar archive, compressed using bzip2 tgz tar archive, compressed using gzip txz tar archive, compressed using lzma (only in Python 3) uzip zip archive, uncompressed zip zip archive, compressed using deflate The exact name of the destination archive or directory is given using a format string; see hg help export for details. Each member added to an archive file has a directory prefix prepended. Use -p/--prefix to specify a format string for the prefix. The default is the basename of the archive, with suf‐ fixes removed. Returns 0 on success. Options: --no-decode do not pass files through decoders -p,--prefix <PREFIX> directory prefix for files in archive -r,--rev <REV> revision to distribute -t,--type <TYPE> type of distribution to create -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times bundle create a bundle file: hg bundle [-f] [-t BUNDLESPEC] [-a] [-r REV]... [--base REV]... FILE [DEST]... Generate a bundle file containing data to be transferred to another repository. To create a bundle containing all changesets, use -a/--all (or --base null). Otherwise, hg assumes the destination will have all the nodes you specify with --base parameters. Other‐ wise, hg will assume the repository has all the nodes in destination, or default-push/default if no destination is specified, where destination is the repositories you provide through DEST option. You can change bundle format with the -t/--type option. See hg help bundlespec for documenta‐ tion on this format. By default, the most appropriate format is used and compression defaults to bzip2. The bundle file can then be transferred using conventional means and applied to another repository with the unbundle or pull command. This is useful when direct push and pull are not available or when exporting an entire repository is undesirable. Applying bundles preserves all changeset contents including permissions, copy/rename informa‐ tion, and revision history. Returns 0 on success, 1 if no changes found. Options: -f, --force run even when the destination is unrelated -r,--rev <REV[+]> a changeset intended to be added to the destination -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]> a specific branch you would like to bundle --base <REV[+]> a base changeset assumed to be available at the destination -a, --all bundle all changesets in the repository -t,--type <TYPE> bundle compression type to use (default: bzip2) -e,--ssh <CMD> specify ssh command to use --remotecmd <CMD> specify hg command to run on the remote side --insecure do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config) [+] marked option can be specified multiple times export dump the header and diffs for one or more changesets: hg export [OPTION]... [-o OUTFILESPEC] [-r] [REV]... Print the changeset header and diffs for one or more revisions. If no revision is given, the parent of the working directory is used. The information shown in the changeset header is: author, date, branch name (if non-default), changeset hash, parent(s) and commit comment. Note hg export may generate unexpected diff output for merge changesets, as it will compare the merge changeset against its first parent only. Output may be to a file, in which case the name of the file is given using a template string. See hg help templates. In addition to the common template keywords, the following formatting rules are supported: %% literal "%" character %H changeset hash (40 hexadecimal digits) %N number of patches being generated %R changeset revision number %b basename of the exporting repository %h short-form changeset hash (12 hexadecimal digits) %m first line of the commit message (only alphanumeric characters) %n zero-padded sequence number, starting at 1 %r zero-padded changeset revision number \ literal "" character Without the -a/--text option, export will avoid generating diffs of files it detects as bi‐ nary. With -a, export will generate a diff anyway, probably with undesirable results. With -B/--bookmark changesets reachable by the given bookmark are selected. Use the -g/--git option to generate diffs in the git extended diff format. See hg help diffs for more information. With the --switch-parent option, the diff will be against the second parent. It can be useful to review a merge. Template: The following keywords are supported in addition to the common template keywords and func‐ tions. See also hg help templates. diff String. Diff content. parents List of strings. Parent nodes of the changeset. Examples: • use export and import to transplant a bugfix to the current branch: hg export -r 9353 | hg import - • export all the changesets between two revisions to a file with rename information: hg export --git -r 123:150 > changes.txt • split outgoing changes into a series of patches with descriptive names: hg export -r "outgoing()" -o "%n-%m.patch" Returns 0 on success. Options: -B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK> export changes only reachable by given bookmark -o,--output <FORMAT> print output to file with formatted name --switch-parent diff against the second parent -r,--rev <REV[+]> revisions to export -a, --text treat all files as text -g, --git use git extended diff format (DEFAULT: diff.git) --binary generate binary diffs in git mode (default) --nodates omit dates from diff headers -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template [+] marked option can be specified multiple times import import an ordered set of patches: hg import [OPTION]... PATCH... Import a list of patches and commit them individually (unless --no-commit is specified). To read a patch from standard input (stdin), use "-" as the patch name. If a URL is speci‐ fied, the patch will be downloaded from there. Import first applies changes to the working directory (unless --bypass is specified), import will abort if there are outstanding changes. Use --bypass to apply and commit patches directly to the repository, without affecting the working directory. Without --exact, patches will be applied on top of the working directory parent revision. You can import a patch straight from a mail message. Even patches as attachments work (to use the body part, it must have type text/plain or text/x-patch). From and Subject headers of email message are used as default committer and commit message. All text/plain body parts be‐ fore first diff are added to the commit message. If the imported patch was generated by hg export, user and description from patch override values from message headers and body. Values given on command line with -m/--message and -u/--user override these. If --exact is specified, import will set the working directory to the parent of each patch before applying it, and will abort if the resulting changeset has a different ID than the one recorded in the patch. This will guard against various ways that portable patch formats and mail systems might fail to transfer Mercurial data or metadata. See hg bundle for lossless transmission. Use --partial to ensure a changeset will be created from the patch even if some hunks fail to apply. Hunks that fail to apply will be written to a <target-file>.rej file. Conflicts can then be resolved by hand before hg commit --amend is run to update the created changeset. This flag exists to let people import patches that partially apply without losing the associ‐ ated metadata (author, date, description, ...). Note When no hunks apply cleanly, hg import --partial will create an empty changeset, im‐ porting only the patch metadata. With -s/--similarity, hg will attempt to discover renames and copies in the patch in the same way as hg addremove. It is possible to use external patch programs to perform the patch by setting the ui.patch configuration option. For the default internal tool, the fuzz can also be configured via patch.fuzz. See hg help config for more information about configuration files and how to use these options. See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date. Examples: • import a traditional patch from a website and detect renames: hg import -s 80 http://example.com/bugfix.patch • import a changeset from an hgweb server: hg import https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg/rev/5ca8c111e9aa • import all the patches in an Unix-style mbox: hg import incoming-patches.mbox • import patches from stdin: hg import - • attempt to exactly restore an exported changeset (not always possible): hg import --exact proposed-fix.patch • use an external tool to apply a patch which is too fuzzy for the default internal tool. hg import --config ui.patch="patch --merge" fuzzy.patch • change the default fuzzing from 2 to a less strict 7 hg import --config ui.fuzz=7 fuzz.patch Returns 0 on success, 1 on partial success (see --partial). Options: -p,--strip <NUM> directory strip option for patch. This has the same meaning as the corresponding patch option (default: 1) -b,--base <PATH> base path (DEPRECATED) --secret use the secret phase for committing -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages -f, --force skip check for outstanding uncommitted changes (DEPRECATED) --no-commit don't commit, just update the working directory --bypass apply patch without touching the working directory --partial commit even if some hunks fail --exact abort if patch would apply lossily --prefix <DIR> apply patch to subdirectory --import-branch use any branch information in patch (implied by --exact) -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -l,--logfile <FILE> read commit message from file -d,--date <DATE> record the specified date as commit date -u,--user <USER> record the specified user as committer -s,--similarity <SIMILARITY> guess renamed files by similarity (0<=s<=100) aliases: patch unbundle apply one or more bundle files: hg unbundle [-u] FILE... Apply one or more bundle files generated by hg bundle. Returns 0 on success, 1 if an update has unresolved files. Options: -u, --update update to new branch head if changesets were unbundled Repository maintenance manifest output the current or given revision of the project manifest: hg manifest [-r REV] Print a list of version controlled files for the given revision. If no revision is given, the first parent of the working directory is used, or the null revision if no revision is checked out. With -v, print file permissions, symlink and executable bits. With --debug, print file revi‐ sion hashes. If option --all is specified, the list of all files from all revisions is printed. This in‐ cludes deleted and renamed files. Returns 0 on success. Options: -r,--rev <REV> revision to display --all list files from all revisions -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template recover roll back an interrupted transaction: hg recover Recover from an interrupted commit or pull. This command tries to fix the repository status after an interrupted operation. It should only be necessary when Mercurial suggests it. Returns 0 if successful, 1 if nothing to recover or verify fails. Options: --verify run hg verify after successful recover rollback roll back the last transaction (DANGEROUS) (DEPRECATED): hg rollback Please use hg commit --amend instead of rollback to correct mistakes in the last commit. This command should be used with care. There is only one level of rollback, and there is no way to undo a rollback. It will also restore the dirstate at the time of the last transac‐ tion, losing any dirstate changes since that time. This command does not alter the working directory. Transactions are used to encapsulate the effects of all commands that create new changesets or propagate existing changesets into a repository. For example, the following commands are transactional, and their effects can be rolled back: • commit • import • pull • push (with this repository as the destination) • unbundle To avoid permanent data loss, rollback will refuse to rollback a commit transaction if it isn't checked out. Use --force to override this protection. The rollback command can be entirely disabled by setting the ui.rollback configuration set‐ ting to false. If you're here because you want to use rollback and it's disabled, you can re-enable the command by setting ui.rollback to true. This command is not intended for use on public repositories. Once changes are visible for pull by other users, rolling a transaction back locally is ineffective (someone else may al‐ ready have pulled the changes). Furthermore, a race is possible with readers of the reposi‐ tory; for example an in-progress pull from the repository may fail if a rollback is per‐ formed. Returns 0 on success, 1 if no rollback data is available. Options: -n, --dry-run do not perform actions, just print output -f, --force ignore safety measures verify verify the integrity of the repository: hg verify Verify the integrity of the current repository. This will perform an extensive check of the repository's integrity, validating the hashes and checksums of each entry in the changelog, manifest, and tracked files, as well as the integ‐ rity of their crosslinks and indices. Please see https://mercurial-scm.org/wiki/RepositoryCorruption for more information about re‐ covery from corruption of the repository. Returns 0 on success, 1 if errors are encountered. Options: --full perform more checks (EXPERIMENTAL) Help config show combined config settings from all hgrc files: hg config [-u] [NAME]... With no arguments, print names and values of all config items. With one argument of the form section.name, print just the value of that config item. With multiple arguments, print names and values of all config items with matching section names or section.names. With --edit, start an editor on the user-level config file. With --global, edit the sys‐ tem-wide config file. With --local, edit the repository-level config file. With --source, the source (filename and line number) is printed for each config item. See hg help config for more information about config files. --non-shared flag is used to edit .hg/hgrc-not-shared config file. This file is not shared across shares when in share-safe mode. Template: The following keywords are supported. See also hg help templates. name String. Config name. source String. Filename and line number where the item is defined. value String. Config value. The --shared flag can be used to edit the config file of shared source repository. It only works when you have shared using the experimental share safe feature. Returns 0 on success, 1 if NAME does not exist. Options: -u, --untrusted show untrusted configuration options --exp-all-known show all known config option (EXPERIMENTAL) -e, --edit edit user config -l, --local edit repository config --source show source of configuration value --shared edit shared source repository config (EXPERIMENTAL) --non-shared edit non shared config (EXPERIMENTAL) -g, --global edit global config -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template aliases: showconfig debugconfig help show help for a given topic or a help overview: hg help [-eck] [-s PLATFORM] [TOPIC] With no arguments, print a list of commands with short help messages. Given a topic, extension, or command name, print help for that topic. Returns 0 if successful. Options: -e, --extension show only help for extensions -c, --command show only help for commands -k, --keyword show topics matching keyword -s,--system <PLATFORM[+]> show help for specific platform(s) [+] marked option can be specified multiple times version output version and copyright information: hg version Template: The following keywords are supported. See also hg help templates. extensions List of extensions. ver String. Version number. And each entry of {extensions} provides the following sub-keywords in addition to {ver}. bundled Boolean. True if included in the release. name String. Extension name. Options: -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template Uncategorized commands BUNDLE FILE FORMATS Mercurial supports generating standalone "bundle" files that hold repository data. These "bundles" are typically saved locally and used later or exchanged between different reposito‐ ries, possibly on different machines. Example commands using bundles are hg bundle and hg un‐‐ bundle. Generation of bundle files is controlled by a "bundle specification" ("bundlespec") string. This string tells the bundle generation process how to create the bundle. A "bundlespec" string is composed of the following elements: type A string denoting the bundle format to use. compression Denotes the compression engine to use compressing the raw bundle data. parameters Arbitrary key-value parameters to further control bundle generation. A "bundlespec" string has the following formats: <type> The literal bundle format string is used. <compression>-<type> The compression engine and format are delimited by a hyphen (-). Optional parameters follow the <type>. Parameters are URI escaped key=value pairs. Each pair is delimited by a semicolon (;). The first parameter begins after a ; immediately following the <type> value. Available Types The following bundle <type> strings are available: v1 Produces a legacy "changegroup" version 1 bundle. This format is compatible with nearly all Mercurial clients because it is the oldest. However, it has some limitations, which is why it is no longer the default for new repositories. v1 bundles can be used with modern repositories using the "generaldelta" storage for‐ mat. However, it may take longer to produce the bundle and the resulting bundle may be significantly larger than a v2 bundle. v1 bundles can only use the gzip, bzip2, and none compression formats. v2 Produces a version 2 bundle. Version 2 bundles are an extensible format that can store additional repository data (such as bookmarks and phases information) and they can store data more efficiently, resulting in smaller bundles. Version 2 bundles can also use modern compression engines, such as zstd, making them faster to compress and often smaller. Available Compression Engines The following bundle <compression> engines can be used: bzip2 An algorithm that produces smaller bundles than gzip. All Mercurial clients should support this format. This engine will likely produce smaller bundles than gzip but will be significantly slower, both during compression and decompression. If available, the zstd engine can yield similar or better compression at much higher speeds. gzip zlib compression using the DEFLATE algorithm. All Mercurial clients should support this format. The compression algorithm strikes a reasonable balance between compression ratio and size. none No compression is performed. Use this compression engine to explicitly disable compression. Examples v2 Produce a v2 bundle using default options, including compression. none-v1 Produce a v1 bundle with no compression. zstd-v2 Produce a v2 bundle with zstandard compression using default settings. zstd-v1 This errors because zstd is not supported for v1 types. COLORIZING OUTPUTS Mercurial colorizes output from several commands. For example, the diff command shows additions in green and deletions in red, while the status command shows modified files in magenta. Many other commands have analogous colors. It is possible to customize these colors. To enable color (default) whenever possible use: [ui] color = yes To disable color use: [ui] color = no See hg help config.ui.color for details. The default pager on Windows does not support color, so enabling the pager will effectively disable color. See hg help config.ui.paginate to disable the pager. Alternately, MSYS and Cygwin shells provide less as a pager, which can be configured to support ANSI color mode. Windows 10 natively supports ANSI color mode. Mode Mercurial can use various systems to display color. The supported modes are ansi, win32, and terminfo. See hg help config.color for details about how to control the mode. Effects Other effects in addition to color, like bold and underlined text, are also available. By de‐ fault, the terminfo database is used to find the terminal codes used to change color and ef‐ fect. If terminfo is not available, then effects are rendered with the ECMA-48 SGR control function (aka ANSI escape codes). The available effects in terminfo mode are 'blink', 'bold', 'dim', 'inverse', 'invisible', 'italic', 'standout', and 'underline'; in ECMA-48 mode, the options are 'bold', 'inverse', 'italic', and 'underline'. How each is rendered depends on the terminal emulator. Some may not be available for a given terminal type, and will be silently ignored. If the terminfo entry for your terminal is missing codes for an effect or has the wrong codes, you can add or override those codes in your configuration: [color] terminfo.dim = \E[2m where 'E' is substituted with an escape character. Labels Text receives color effects depending on the labels that it has. Many default Mercurial com‐ mands emit labelled text. You can also define your own labels in templates using the label function, see hg help templates. A single portion of text may have more than one label. In that case, effects given to the last label will override any other effects. This includes the special "none" effect, which nullifies other effects. Labels are normally invisible. In order to see these labels and their position in the text, use the global --color=debug option. The same anchor text may be associated to multiple la‐ bels, e.g. [log.changeset changeset.secret|changeset: 22611:6f0a53c8f587] The following are the default effects for some default labels. Default effects may be over‐ ridden from your configuration file: [color] status.modified = blue bold underline red_background status.added = green bold status.removed = red bold blue_background status.deleted = cyan bold underline status.unknown = magenta bold underline status.ignored = black bold # 'none' turns off all effects status.clean = none status.copied = none qseries.applied = blue bold underline qseries.unapplied = black bold qseries.missing = red bold diff.diffline = bold diff.extended = cyan bold diff.file_a = red bold diff.file_b = green bold diff.hunk = magenta diff.deleted = red diff.inserted = green diff.changed = white diff.tab = diff.trailingwhitespace = bold red_background # Blank so it inherits the style of the surrounding label changeset.public = changeset.draft = changeset.secret = resolve.unresolved = red bold resolve.resolved = green bold bookmarks.active = green branches.active = none branches.closed = black bold branches.current = green branches.inactive = none tags.normal = green tags.local = black bold rebase.rebased = blue rebase.remaining = red bold shelve.age = cyan shelve.newest = green bold shelve.name = blue bold histedit.remaining = red bold Custom colors Because there are only eight standard colors, Mercurial allows you to define color names for other color slots which might be available for your terminal type, assuming terminfo mode. For instance: color.brightblue = 12 color.pink = 207 color.orange = 202 to set 'brightblue' to color slot 12 (useful for 16 color terminals that have brighter colors defined in the upper eight) and, 'pink' and 'orange' to colors in 256-color xterm's default color cube. These defined colors may then be used as any of the pre-defined eight, including appending '_background' to set the background to that color. DATE FORMATS Some commands allow the user to specify a date, e.g.: • backout, commit, import, tag: Specify the commit date. • log, revert, update: Select revision(s) by date. Many date formats are valid. Here are some examples: • Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006 (local timezone assumed) • Dec 6 13:18 -0600 (year assumed, time offset provided) • Dec 6 13:18 UTC (UTC and GMT are aliases for +0000) • Dec 6 (midnight) • 13:18 (today assumed) • 3:39 (3:39AM assumed) • 3:39pm (15:39) • 2006-12-06 13:18:29 (ISO 8601 format) • 2006-12-6 13:18 • 2006-12-6 • 12-6 • 12/6 • 12/6/6 (Dec 6 2006) • today (midnight) • yesterday (midnight) • now - right now Lastly, there is Mercurial's internal format: • 1165411109 0 (Wed Dec 6 13:18:29 2006 UTC) This is the internal representation format for dates. The first number is the number of sec‐ onds since the epoch (1970-01-01 00:00 UTC). The second is the offset of the local timezone, in seconds west of UTC (negative if the timezone is east of UTC). The log command also accepts date ranges: • <DATE - at or before a given date/time • >DATE - on or after a given date/time • DATE to DATE - a date range, inclusive • -DAYS - within a given number of days from today DEPRECATED FEATURES Mercurial evolves over time, some features, options, commands may be replaced by better and more secure alternatives. This topic will help you migrating your existing usage and/or con‐ figuration to newer features. Commands The following commands are still available but their use are not recommended: locate This command has been replaced by hg files. parents This command can be replaced by hg summary or hg log with appropriate revsets. See hg help revsets for more information. tip The recommended alternative is hg heads. Options web.allowpull Renamed to allow-pull. web.allow_push Renamed to allow-push. DIFF FORMATS Mercurial's default format for showing changes between two versions of a file is compatible with the unified format of GNU diff, which can be used by GNU patch and many other standard tools. While this standard format is often enough, it does not encode the following information: • executable status and other permission bits • copy or rename information • changes in binary files • creation or deletion of empty files Mercurial also supports the extended diff format from the git VCS which addresses these limi‐ tations. The git diff format is not produced by default because a few widespread tools still do not understand this format. This means that when generating diffs from a Mercurial repository (e.g. with hg export), you should be careful about things like file copies and renames or other things mentioned above, because when applying a standard diff to a different repository, this extra information is lost. Mercurial's internal operations (like push and pull) are not affected by this, because they use an internal binary format for communicating changes. To make Mercurial produce the git extended diff format, use the --git option available for many commands, or set 'git = True' in the [diff] section of your configuration file. You do not need to set this option when importing diffs in this format or using them in the mq ex‐ tension. ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES HG Path to the 'hg' executable, automatically passed when running hooks, extensions or external tools. If unset or empty, this is the hg executable's name if it's frozen, or an executable named 'hg' (with %PATHEXT% [defaulting to COM/EXE/BAT/CMD] extensions on Windows) is searched. HGEDITOR This is the name of the editor to run when committing. See EDITOR. (deprecated, see hg help config.ui.editor) HGENCODING This overrides the default locale setting detected by Mercurial. This setting is used to convert data including usernames, changeset descriptions, tag names, and branches. This setting can be overridden with the --encoding command-line option. HGENCODINGMODE This sets Mercurial's behavior for handling unknown characters while transcoding user input. The default is "strict", which causes Mercurial to abort if it can't map a character. Other settings include "replace", which replaces unknown characters, and "ignore", which drops them. This setting can be overridden with the --encodingmode command-line option. HGENCODINGAMBIGUOUS This sets Mercurial's behavior for handling characters with "ambiguous" widths like accented Latin characters with East Asian fonts. By default, Mercurial assumes ambigu‐ ous characters are narrow, set this variable to "wide" if such characters cause for‐ matting problems. HGMERGE An executable to use for resolving merge conflicts. The program will be executed with three arguments: local file, remote file, ancestor file. (deprecated, see hg help config.ui.merge) HGRCPATH A list of files or directories to search for configuration files. Item separator is ":" on Unix, ";" on Windows. If HGRCPATH is not set, platform default search path is used. If empty, only the .hg/hgrc from the current repository is read. For each element in HGRCPATH: • if it's a directory, all files ending with .rc are added • otherwise, the file itself will be added HGRCSKIPREPO When set, the .hg/hgrc from repositories are not read. HGPLAIN When set, this disables any configuration settings that might change Mercurial's de‐ fault output. This includes encoding, defaults, verbose mode, debug mode, quiet mode, tracebacks, and localization. This can be useful when scripting against Mercurial in the face of existing user configuration. In addition to the features disabled by HGPLAIN=, the following values can be speci‐ fied to adjust behavior: +strictflags Restrict parsing of command line flags. Equivalent options set via command line flags or environment variables are not over‐ ridden. See hg help scripting for details. HGPLAINEXCEPT This is a comma-separated list of features to preserve when HGPLAIN is enabled. Cur‐ rently the following values are supported: alias Don't remove aliases. color Don't disable colored output. i18n Preserve internationalization. revsetalias Don't remove revset aliases. templatealias Don't remove template aliases. progress Don't hide progress output. Setting HGPLAINEXCEPT to anything (even an empty string) will enable plain mode. HGUSER This is the string used as the author of a commit. If not set, available values will be considered in this order: • HGUSER (deprecated) • configuration files from the HGRCPATH • EMAIL • interactive prompt • LOGNAME (with @hostname appended) (deprecated, see hg help config.ui.username) EMAIL May be used as the author of a commit; see HGUSER. LOGNAME May be used as the author of a commit; see HGUSER. VISUAL This is the name of the editor to use when committing. See EDITOR. EDITOR Sometimes Mercurial needs to open a text file in an editor for a user to modify, for example when writing commit messages. The editor it uses is determined by looking at the environment variables HGEDITOR, VISUAL and EDITOR, in that order. The first non-empty one is chosen. If all of them are empty, the editor defaults to 'vi'. PYTHONPATH This is used by Python to find imported modules and may need to be set appropriately if this Mercurial is not installed system-wide. SAFELY REWRITING HISTORY (EXPERIMENTAL) Obsolescence markers make it possible to mark changesets that have been deleted or superseded in a new version of the changeset. Unlike the previous way of handling such changes, by stripping the old changesets from the repository, obsolescence markers can be propagated between repositories. This allows for a safe and simple way of exchanging mutable history and altering it after the fact. Changeset phases are respected, such that only draft and secret changesets can be altered (see hg help phases for details). Obsolescence is tracked using "obsolescence markers", a piece of metadata tracking which changesets have been made obsolete, potential successors for a given changeset, the moment the changeset was marked as obsolete, and the user who performed the rewriting operation. The markers are stored separately from standard changeset data can be exchanged without any of the precursor changesets, preventing unnecessary exchange of obsolescence data. The complete set of obsolescence markers describes a history of changeset modifications that is orthogonal to the repository history of file modifications. This changeset history allows for detection and automatic resolution of edge cases arising from multiple users rewriting the same part of history concurrently. Current feature status This feature is still in development. Instability Rewriting changesets might introduce instability. There are two main kinds of instability: orphaning and diverging. Orphans are changesets left behind when their ancestors are rewritten. Divergence has two variants: • Content-divergence occurs when independent rewrites of the same changesets lead to differ‐ ent results. • Phase-divergence occurs when the old (obsolete) version of a changeset becomes public. It is possible to prevent local creation of orphans by using the following config: [experimental] evolution.createmarkers = true evolution.exchange = true You can also enable that option explicitly: [experimental] evolution.createmarkers = true evolution.exchange = true evolution.allowunstable = true USING ADDITIONAL FEATURES Mercurial has the ability to add new features through the use of extensions. Extensions may add new commands, add options to existing commands, change the default behavior of commands, or implement hooks. To enable the "foo" extension, either shipped with Mercurial or in the Python search path, create an entry for it in your configuration file, like this: [extensions] foo = You may also specify the full path to an extension: [extensions] myfeature = ~/.hgext/myfeature.py See hg help config for more information on configuration files. Extensions are not loaded by default for a variety of reasons: they can increase startup overhead; they may be meant for advanced usage only; they may provide potentially dangerous abilities (such as letting you destroy or modify history); they might not be ready for prime time; or they may alter some usual behaviors of stock Mercurial. It is thus up to the user to activate extensions as needed. To explicitly disable an extension enabled in a configuration file of broader scope, prepend its path with !: [extensions] # disabling extension bar residing in /path/to/extension/bar.py bar = !/path/to/extension/bar.py # ditto, but no path was supplied for extension baz baz = ! disabled extensions: acl hooks for controlling repository access blackbox log repository events to a blackbox for debugging bugzilla hooks for integrating with the Bugzilla bug tracker censor erase file content at a given revision churn command to display statistics about repository history clonebundles advertise pre-generated bundles to seed clones closehead close arbitrary heads without checking them out first convert import revisions from foreign VCS repositories into Mercurial eol automatically manage newlines in repository files extdiff command to allow external programs to compare revisions factotum http authentication with factotum fastexport export repositories as git fast-import stream githelp try mapping git commands to Mercurial commands gpg commands to sign and verify changesets hgk browse the repository in a graphical way highlight syntax highlighting for hgweb (requires Pygments) histedit interactive history editing keyword expand keywords in tracked files largefiles track large binary files mq manage a stack of patches notify hooks for sending email push notifications patchbomb command to send changesets as (a series of) patch emails rebase command to move sets of revisions to a different ancestor relink recreates hardlinks between repository clones schemes extend schemes with shortcuts to repository swarms share share a common history between several working directories transplant command to transplant changesets from another branch win32mbcs allow the use of MBCS paths with problematic encodings zeroconf discover and advertise repositories on the local network SPECIFYING FILE SETS Mercurial supports a functional language for selecting a set of files. Like other file patterns, this pattern type is indicated by a prefix, 'set:'. The language supports a number of predicates which are joined by infix operators. Parenthesis can be used for grouping. Identifiers such as filenames or patterns must be quoted with single or double quotes if they contain characters outside of [.*{}[]?/\_a-zA-Z0-9\x80-\xff] or if they match one of the pre‐ defined predicates. This generally applies to file patterns other than globs and arguments for predicates. Pattern prefixes such as path: may be specified without quoting. Special characters can be used in quoted identifiers by escaping them, e.g., \n is inter‐ preted as a newline. To prevent them from being interpreted, strings can be prefixed with r, e.g. r'...'. See also hg help patterns. Operators There is a single prefix operator: not x Files not in x. Short form is ! x. These are the supported infix operators: x and y The intersection of files in x and y. Short form is x & y. x or y The union of files in x and y. There are two alternative short forms: x | y and x + y. x - y Files in x but not in y. Predicates The following predicates are supported: added() File that is added according to hg status. binary() File that appears to be binary (contains NUL bytes). clean() File that is clean according to hg status. copied() File that is recorded as being copied. deleted() Alias for missing(). encoding(name) File can be successfully decoded with the given character encoding. May not be useful for encodings other than ASCII and UTF-8. eol(style) File contains newlines of the given style (dos, unix, mac). Binary files are excluded, files with mixed line endings match multiple styles. exec() File that is marked as executable. grep(regex) File contains the given regular expression. hgignore() File that matches the active .hgignore pattern. ignored() File that is ignored according to hg status. missing() File that is missing according to hg status. modified() File that is modified according to hg status. portable() File that has a portable name. (This doesn't include filenames with case collisions.) removed() File that is removed according to hg status. resolved() File that is marked resolved according to hg resolve -l. revs(revs, pattern) Evaluate set in the specified revisions. If the revset match multiple revs, this will return file matching pattern in any of the revision. size(expression) File size matches the given expression. Examples: • size('1k') - files from 1024 to 2047 bytes • size('< 20k') - files less than 20480 bytes • size('>= .5MB') - files at least 524288 bytes • size('4k - 1MB') - files from 4096 bytes to 1048576 bytes status(base, rev, pattern) Evaluate predicate using status change between base and rev. Examples: • status(3, 7, added()) - matches files added from "3" to "7" subrepo([pattern]) Subrepositories whose paths match the given pattern. symlink() File that is marked as a symlink. tracked() File that is under Mercurial control. unknown() File that is unknown according to hg status. unresolved() File that is marked unresolved according to hg resolve -l. Examples Some sample queries: • Show status of files that appear to be binary in the working directory: hg status -A "set:binary()" • Forget files that are in .hgignore but are already tracked: hg forget "set:hgignore() and not ignored()" • Find text files that contain a string: hg files "set:grep(magic) and not binary()" • Find C files in a non-standard encoding: hg files "set:**.c and not encoding('UTF-8')" • Revert copies of large binary files: hg revert "set:copied() and binary() and size('>1M')" • Revert files that were added to the working directory: hg revert "set:revs('wdir()', added())" • Remove files listed in foo.lst that contain the letter a or b: hg remove "set: listfile:foo.lst and (**a* or **b*)" COMMAND-LINE FLAGS Most Mercurial commands accept various flags. Flag names Flags for each command are listed in hg help for that command. Additionally, some flags, such as --repository, are global and can be used with any command - those are seen in hg help -v, and can be specified before or after the command. Every flag has at least a long name, such as --repository. Some flags may also have a short one-letter name, such as the equivalent -R. Using the short or long name is equivalent and has the same effect. The long name may be abbreviated to any unambiguous prefix. For example, hg commit --amend can be abbreviated to hg commit --am. Flags that have a short name can also be bundled together - for instance, to specify both --edit (short -e) and --interactive (short -i), one could use: hg commit -ei If any of the bundled flags takes a value (i.e. is not a boolean), it must be last, followed by the value: hg commit -im 'Message' Flag types Mercurial command-line flags can be strings, numbers, booleans, or lists of strings. Specifying flag values The following syntaxes are allowed, assuming a flag 'flagname' with short name 'f': --flagname=foo --flagname foo -f foo -ffoo This syntax applies to all non-boolean flags (strings, numbers or lists). Specifying boolean flags Boolean flags do not take a value parameter. To specify a boolean, use the flag name to set it to true, or the same name prefixed with 'no-' to set it to false: hg commit --interactive hg commit --no-interactive Specifying list flags List flags take multiple values. To specify them, pass the flag multiple times: hg files --include mercurial --include tests Setting flag defaults In order to set a default value for a flag in an hgrc file, it is recommended to use aliases: [alias] commit = commit --interactive For more information on hgrc files, see hg help config. Overriding flags on the command line If the same non-list flag is specified multiple times on the command line, the latest speci‐ fication is used: hg commit -m "Ignored value" -m "Used value" This includes the use of aliases - e.g., if one has: [alias] committemp = commit -m "Ignored value" then the following command will override that -m: hg committemp -m "Used value" Overriding flag defaults Every flag has a default value, and you may also set your own defaults in hgrc as described above. Except for list flags, defaults can be overridden on the command line simply by spec‐ ifying the flag in that location. Hidden flags Some flags are not shown in a command's help by default - specifically, those that are deemed to be experimental, deprecated or advanced. To show all flags, add the --verbose flag for the help command: hg help --verbose commit GLOSSARY Ancestor Any changeset that can be reached by an unbroken chain of parent changesets from a given changeset. More precisely, the ancestors of a changeset can be defined by two properties: a parent of a changeset is an ancestor, and a parent of an ancestor is an ancestor. See also: 'Descendant'. Bookmark Bookmarks are pointers to certain commits that move when committing. They are similar to tags in that it is possible to use bookmark names in all places where Mercurial ex‐ pects a changeset ID, e.g., with hg update. Unlike tags, bookmarks move along when you make a commit. Bookmarks can be renamed, copied and deleted. Bookmarks are local, unless they are ex‐ plicitly pushed or pulled between repositories. Pushing and pulling bookmarks allow you to collaborate with others on a branch without creating a named branch. Branch (Noun) A child changeset that has been created from a parent that is not a head. These are known as topological branches, see 'Branch, topological'. If a topological branch is named, it becomes a named branch. If a topological branch is not named, it becomes an anonymous branch. See 'Branch, anonymous' and 'Branch, named'. Branches may be created when changes are pulled from or pushed to a remote repository, since new heads may be created by these operations. Note that the term branch can also be used informally to describe a development process in which certain development is done independently of other development. This is sometimes done explicitly with a named branch, but it can also be done locally, using bookmarks or clones and anonymous branches. Example: "The experimental branch." (Verb) The action of creating a child changeset which results in its parent having more than one child. Example: "I'm going to branch at X." Branch, anonymous Every time a new child changeset is created from a parent that is not a head and the name of the branch is not changed, a new anonymous branch is created. Branch, closed A named branch whose branch heads have all been closed. Branch, default The branch assigned to a changeset when no name has previously been assigned. Branch head See 'Head, branch'. Branch, inactive If a named branch has no topological heads, it is considered to be inactive. As an ex‐ ample, a feature branch becomes inactive when it is merged into the default branch. The hg branches command shows inactive branches by default, though they can be hidden with hg branches --active. NOTE: this concept is deprecated because it is too implicit. Branches should now be explicitly closed using hg commit --close-branch when they are no longer needed. Branch, named A collection of changesets which have the same branch name. By default, children of a changeset in a named branch belong to the same named branch. A child can be explicitly assigned to a different branch. See hg help branch, hg help branches and hg commit --close-branch for more information on managing branches. Named branches can be thought of as a kind of namespace, dividing the collection of changesets that comprise the repository into a collection of disjoint subsets. A named branch is not necessarily a topological branch. If a new named branch is created from the head of another named branch, or the default branch, but no further changesets are added to that previous branch, then that previous branch will be a branch in name only. Branch tip See 'Tip, branch'. Branch, topological Every time a new child changeset is created from a parent that is not a head, a new topological branch is created. If a topological branch is named, it becomes a named branch. If a topological branch is not named, it becomes an anonymous branch of the current, possibly default, branch. Changelog A record of the changesets in the order in which they were added to the repository. This includes details such as changeset id, author, commit message, date, and list of changed files. Changeset A snapshot of the state of the repository used to record a change. Changeset, child The converse of parent changeset: if P is a parent of C, then C is a child of P. There is no limit to the number of children that a changeset may have. Changeset id A SHA-1 hash that uniquely identifies a changeset. It may be represented as either a "long" 40 hexadecimal digit string, or a "short" 12 hexadecimal digit string. Changeset, merge A changeset with two parents. This occurs when a merge is committed. Changeset, parent A revision upon which a child changeset is based. Specifically, a parent changeset of a changeset C is a changeset whose node immediately precedes C in the DAG. Changesets have at most two parents. Checkout (Noun) The working directory being updated to a specific revision. This use should probably be avoided where possible, as changeset is much more appropriate than check‐ out in this context. Example: "I'm using checkout X." (Verb) Updating the working directory to a specific changeset. See hg help update. Example: "I'm going to check out changeset X." Child changeset See 'Changeset, child'. Close changeset See 'Head, closed branch'. Closed branch See 'Branch, closed'. Clone (Noun) An entire or partial copy of a repository. The partial clone must be in the form of a revision and its ancestors. Example: "Is your clone up to date?" (Verb) The process of creating a clone, using hg clone. Example: "I'm going to clone the repository." Closed branch head See 'Head, closed branch'. Commit (Noun) A synonym for changeset. Example: "Is the bug fixed in your recent commit?" (Verb) The act of recording changes to a repository. When files are committed in a working directory, Mercurial finds the differences between the committed files and their parent changeset, creating a new changeset in the repository. Example: "You should commit those changes now." Cset A common abbreviation of the term changeset. DAG The repository of changesets of a distributed version control system (DVCS) can be de‐ scribed as a directed acyclic graph (DAG), consisting of nodes and edges, where nodes correspond to changesets and edges imply a parent -> child relation. This graph can be visualized by graphical tools such as hg log --graph. In Mercurial, the DAG is limited by the requirement for children to have at most two parents. Deprecated Feature removed from documentation, but not scheduled for removal. Default branch See 'Branch, default'. Descendant Any changeset that can be reached by a chain of child changesets from a given change‐ set. More precisely, the descendants of a changeset can be defined by two properties: the child of a changeset is a descendant, and the child of a descendant is a descen‐ dant. See also: 'Ancestor'. Diff (Noun) The difference between the contents and attributes of files in two changesets or a changeset and the current working directory. The difference is usually repre‐ sented in a standard form called a "diff" or "patch". The "git diff" format is used when the changes include copies, renames, or changes to file attributes, none of which can be represented/handled by classic "diff" and "patch". Example: "Did you see my correction in the diff?" (Verb) Diffing two changesets is the action of creating a diff or patch. Example: "If you diff with changeset X, you will see what I mean." Directory, working The working directory represents the state of the files tracked by Mercurial, that will be recorded in the next commit. The working directory initially corresponds to the snapshot at an existing changeset, known as the parent of the working directory. See 'Parent, working directory'. The state may be modified by changes to the files in‐ troduced manually or by a merge. The repository metadata exists in the .hg directory inside the working directory. Draft Changesets in the draft phase have not been shared with publishing repositories and may thus be safely changed by history-modifying extensions. See hg help phases. Experimental Feature that may change or be removed at a later date. Graph See DAG and hg log --graph. Head The term 'head' may be used to refer to both a branch head or a repository head, de‐ pending on the context. See 'Head, branch' and 'Head, repository' for specific defini‐ tions. Heads are where development generally takes place and are the usual targets for update and merge operations. Head, branch A changeset with no descendants on the same named branch. Head, closed branch A changeset that marks a head as no longer interesting. The closed head is no longer listed by hg heads. A branch is considered closed when all its heads are closed and consequently is not listed by hg branches. Closed heads can be re-opened by committing new changeset as the child of the change‐ set that marks a head as closed. Head, repository A topological head which has not been closed. Head, topological A changeset with no children in the repository. History, immutable Once committed, changesets cannot be altered. Extensions which appear to change his‐ tory actually create new changesets that replace existing ones, and then destroy the old changesets. Doing so in public repositories can result in old changesets being reintroduced to the repository. History, rewriting The changesets in a repository are immutable. However, extensions to Mercurial can be used to alter the repository, usually in such a way as to preserve changeset contents. Immutable history See 'History, immutable'. Merge changeset See 'Changeset, merge'. Manifest Each changeset has a manifest, which is the list of files that are tracked by the changeset. Merge Used to bring together divergent branches of work. When you update to a changeset and then merge another changeset, you bring the history of the latter changeset into your working directory. Once conflicts are resolved (and marked), this merge may be commit‐ ted as a merge changeset, bringing two branches together in the DAG. Named branch See 'Branch, named'. Null changeset The empty changeset. It is the parent state of newly-initialized repositories and repositories with no checked out revision. It is thus the parent of root changesets and the effective ancestor when merging unrelated changesets. Can be specified by the alias 'null' or by the changeset ID '000000000000'. Parent See 'Changeset, parent'. Parent changeset See 'Changeset, parent'. Parent, working directory The working directory parent reflects a virtual revision which is the child of the changeset (or two changesets with an uncommitted merge) shown by hg parents. This is changed with hg update. Other commands to see the working directory parent are hg sum‐‐ mary and hg id. Can be specified by the alias ".". Patch (Noun) The product of a diff operation. Example: "I've sent you my patch." (Verb) The process of using a patch file to transform one changeset into another. Example: "You will need to patch that revision." Phase A per-changeset state tracking how the changeset has been or should be shared. See hg help phases. Public Changesets in the public phase have been shared with publishing repositories and are therefore considered immutable. See hg help phases. Pull An operation in which changesets in a remote repository which are not in the local repository are brought into the local repository. Note that this operation without special arguments only updates the repository, it does not update the files in the working directory. See hg help pull. Push An operation in which changesets in a local repository which are not in a remote repository are sent to the remote repository. Note that this operation only adds changesets which have been committed locally to the remote repository. Uncommitted changes are not sent. See hg help push. Repository The metadata describing all recorded states of a collection of files. Each recorded state is represented by a changeset. A repository is usually (but not always) found in the .hg subdirectory of a working directory. Any recorded state can be recreated by "updating" a working directory to a specific changeset. Repository head See 'Head, repository'. Revision A state of the repository at some point in time. Earlier revisions can be updated to by using hg update. See also 'Revision number'; See also 'Changeset'. Revision number This integer uniquely identifies a changeset in a specific repository. It represents the order in which changesets were added to a repository, starting with revision num‐ ber 0. Note that the revision number may be different in each clone of a repository. To identify changesets uniquely between different clones, see 'Changeset id'. Revlog History storage mechanism used by Mercurial. It is a form of delta encoding, with oc‐ casional full revision of data followed by delta of each successive revision. It in‐ cludes data and an index pointing to the data. Rewriting history See 'History, rewriting'. Root A changeset that has only the null changeset as its parent. Most repositories have only a single root changeset. Secret Changesets in the secret phase may not be shared via push, pull, or clone. See hg help phases. Tag An alternative name given to a changeset. Tags can be used in all places where Mercu‐ rial expects a changeset ID, e.g., with hg update. The creation of a tag is stored in the history and will thus automatically be shared with other using push and pull. Tip The changeset with the highest revision number. It is the changeset most recently added in a repository. Tip, branch The head of a given branch with the highest revision number. When a branch name is used as a revision identifier, it refers to the branch tip. See also 'Branch, head'. Note that because revision numbers may be different in different repository clones, the branch tip may be different in different cloned repositories. Update (Noun) Another synonym of changeset. Example: "I've pushed an update." (Verb) This term is usually used to describe updating the state of the working direc‐ tory to that of a specific changeset. See hg help update. Example: "You should update." Working directory See 'Directory, working'. Working directory parent See 'Parent, working directory'. SYNTAX FOR MERCURIAL IGNORE FILES Synopsis The Mercurial system uses a file called .hgignore in the root directory of a repository to control its behavior when it searches for files that it is not currently tracking. Description The working directory of a Mercurial repository will often contain files that should not be tracked by Mercurial. These include backup files created by editors and build products cre‐ ated by compilers. These files can be ignored by listing them in a .hgignore file in the root of the working directory. The .hgignore file must be created manually. It is typically put under version control, so that the settings will propagate to other repositories with push and pull. An untracked file is ignored if its path relative to the repository root directory, or any prefix path of that path, is matched against any pattern in .hgignore. For example, say we have an untracked file, file.c, at a/b/file.c inside our repository. Mer‐ curial will ignore file.c if any pattern in .hgignore matches a/b/file.c, a/b or a. In addition, a Mercurial configuration file can reference a set of per-user or global ignore files. See the ignore configuration key on the [ui] section of hg help config for details of how to configure these files. To control Mercurial's handling of files that it manages, many commands support the -I and -X options; see hg help <command> and hg help patterns for details. Files that are already tracked are not affected by .hgignore, even if they appear in .hgig‐ nore. An untracked file X can be explicitly added with hg add X, even if X would be excluded by a pattern in .hgignore. Syntax An ignore file is a plain text file consisting of a list of patterns, with one pattern per line. Empty lines are skipped. The # character is treated as a comment character, and the \ character is treated as an escape character. Mercurial supports several pattern syntaxes. The default syntax used is Python/Perl-style regular expressions. To change the syntax used, use a line of the following form: syntax: NAME where NAME is one of the following: regexp Regular expression, Python/Perl syntax. glob Shell-style glob. rootglob A variant of glob that is rooted (see below). The chosen syntax stays in effect when parsing all patterns that follow, until another syntax is selected. Neither glob nor regexp patterns are rooted. A glob-syntax pattern of the form *.c will match a file ending in .c in any directory, and a regexp pattern of the form \.c$ will do the same. To root a regexp pattern, start it with ^. To get the same effect with glob-syntax, you have to use rootglob. Subdirectories can have their own .hgignore settings by adding subinclude:path/to/sub‐‐ dir/.hgignore to the root .hgignore. See hg help patterns for details on subinclude: and in‐‐ clude:. Note Patterns specified in other than .hgignore are always rooted. Please see hg help pat‐‐ terns for details. Example Here is an example ignore file. # use glob syntax. syntax: glob *.elc *.pyc *~ # switch to regexp syntax. syntax: regexp ^\.pc/ Debugging Use the debugignore command to see if and why a file is ignored, or to see the combined ig‐ nore pattern. See hg help debugignore for details. CONFIGURING HGWEB Mercurial's internal web server, hgweb, can serve either a single repository, or a tree of repositories. In the second case, repository paths and global options can be defined using a dedicated configuration file common to hg serve, hgweb.wsgi, hgweb.cgi and hgweb.fcgi. This file uses the same syntax as other Mercurial configuration files but recognizes only the following sections: • web • paths • collections The web options are thoroughly described in hg help config. The paths section maps URL paths to paths of repositories in the filesystem. hgweb will not expose the filesystem directly - only Mercurial repositories can be published and only ac‐ cording to the configuration. The left hand side is the path in the URL. Note that hgweb reserves subpaths like rev or file, try using different names for nested repositories to avoid confusing effects. The right hand side is the path in the filesystem. If the specified path ends with * or ** the filesystem will be searched recursively for repositories below that point. With * it will not recurse into the repositories it finds (except for .hg/patches). With ** it will also search inside repository working directories and possibly find subrepositories. In this example: [paths] /projects/a = /srv/tmprepos/a /projects/b = c:/repos/b / = /srv/repos/* /user/bob = /home/bob/repos/** • The first two entries make two repositories in different directories appear under the same directory in the web interface • The third entry will publish every Mercurial repository found in /srv/repos/, for instance the repository /srv/repos/quux/ will appear as http://server/quux/ • The fourth entry will publish both http://server/user/bob/quux/ and http://server/user/bob/quux/testsubrepo/ The collections section is deprecated and has been superseded by paths. URLs and Common Arguments URLs under each repository have the form /{command}[/{arguments}] where {command} represents the name of a command or handler and {arguments} represents any number of additional URL pa‐ rameters to that command. The web server has a default style associated with it. Styles map to a collection of named templates. Each template is used to render a specific piece of data, such as a changeset or diff. The style for the current request can be overridden two ways. First, if {command} contains a hyphen (-), the text before the hyphen defines the style. For example, /atom-log will render the log command handler with the atom style. The second way to set the style is with the style query string argument. For example, /log?style=atom. The hyphenated URL parameter is preferred. Not all templates are available for all styles. Attempting to use a style that doesn't have all templates defined may result in an error rendering the page. Many commands take a {revision} URL parameter. This defines the changeset to operate on. This is commonly specified as the short, 12 digit hexadecimal abbreviation for the full 40 charac‐ ter unique revision identifier. However, any value described by hg help revisions typically works. Commands and URLs The following web commands and their URLs are available: /annotate/{revision}/{path} Show changeset information for each line in a file. The ignorews, ignorewsamount, ignorewseol, and ignoreblanklines query string arguments have the same meaning as their [annotate] config equivalents. It uses the hgrc boolean parsing logic to interpret the value. e.g. 0 and false are false and 1 and true are true. If not de‐ fined, the server default settings are used. The fileannotate template is rendered. /archive/{revision}.{format}[/{path}] Obtain an archive of repository content. The content and type of the archive is defined by a URL path parameter. format is the file extension of the archive type to be generated. e.g. zip or tar.bz2. Not all archive types may be allowed by your server configuration. The optional path URL parameter controls content to include in the archive. If omitted, every file in the specified revision is present in the archive. If included, only the specified file or contents of the specified directory will be included in the archive. No template is used for this handler. Raw, binary content is generated. /bookmarks Show information about bookmarks. No arguments are accepted. The bookmarks template is rendered. /branches Show information about branches. All known branches are contained in the output, even closed branches. No arguments are accepted. The branches template is rendered. /changelog[/{revision}] Show information about multiple changesets. If the optional revision URL argument is absent, information about all changesets starting at tip will be rendered. If the revision argument is present, changesets will be shown starting from the specified revision. If revision is absent, the rev query string argument may be defined. This will perform a search for changesets. The argument for rev can be a single revision, a revision set, or a literal keyword to search for in changeset data (equivalent to hg log -k). The revcount query string argument defines the maximum numbers of changesets to render. For non-searches, the changelog template will be rendered. /changeset[/{revision}] Show information about a single changeset. A URL path argument is the changeset identifier to show. See hg help revisions for possible values. If not defined, the tip changeset will be shown. The changeset template is rendered. Contents of the changesettag, changesetbookmark, filen‐‐ odelink, filenolink, and the many templates related to diffs may all be used to produce the output. /comparison/{revision}/{path} Show a comparison between the old and new versions of a file from changes made on a particu‐ lar revision. This is similar to the diff handler. However, this form features a split or side-by-side diff rather than a unified diff. The context query string argument can be used to control the lines of context in the diff. The filecomparison template is rendered. /diff/{revision}/{path} Show how a file changed in a particular commit. The filediff template is rendered. This handler is registered under both the /diff and /filediff paths. /diff is used in modern code. /file/{revision}[/{path}] Show information about a directory or file in the repository. Info about the path given as a URL parameter will be rendered. If path is a directory, information about the entries in that directory will be rendered. This form is equivalent to the manifest handler. If path is a file, information about that file will be shown via the filerevision template. If path is not defined, information about the root directory will be rendered. /diff/{revision}/{path} Show how a file changed in a particular commit. The filediff template is rendered. This handler is registered under both the /diff and /filediff paths. /diff is used in modern code. /filelog/{revision}/{path} Show information about the history of a file in the repository. The revcount query string argument can be defined to control the maximum number of entries to show. The filelog template will be rendered. /graph[/{revision}] Show information about the graphical topology of the repository. Information rendered by this handler can be used to create visual representations of reposi‐ tory topology. The revision URL parameter controls the starting changeset. If it's absent, the default is tip. The revcount query string argument can define the number of changesets to show information for. The graphtop query string argument can specify the starting changeset for producing jsdata variable that is used for rendering graph in JavaScript. By default it has the same value as revision. This handler will render the graph template. /help[/{topic}] Render help documentation. This web command is roughly equivalent to hg help. If a topic is defined, that help topic will be rendered. If not, an index of available help topics will be rendered. The help template will be rendered when requesting help for a topic. helptopics will be ren‐ dered for the index of help topics. /log[/{revision}[/{path}]] Show repository or file history. For URLs of the form /log/{revision}, a list of changesets starting at the specified change‐ set identifier is shown. If {revision} is not defined, the default is tip. This form is equivalent to the changelog handler. For URLs of the form /log/{revision}/{file}, the history for a specific file will be shown. This form is equivalent to the filelog handler. /manifest[/{revision}[/{path}]] Show information about a directory. If the URL path arguments are omitted, information about the root directory for the tip changeset will be shown. Because this handler can only show information for directories, it is recommended to use the file handler instead, as it can handle both directories and files. The manifest template will be rendered for this handler. /changeset[/{revision}] Show information about a single changeset. A URL path argument is the changeset identifier to show. See hg help revisions for possible values. If not defined, the tip changeset will be shown. The changeset template is rendered. Contents of the changesettag, changesetbookmark, filen‐‐ odelink, filenolink, and the many templates related to diffs may all be used to produce the output. /shortlog Show basic information about a set of changesets. This accepts the same parameters as the changelog handler. The only difference is the short‐‐ log template will be rendered instead of the changelog template. /summary Show a summary of repository state. Information about the latest changesets, bookmarks, tags, and branches is captured by this handler. The summary template is rendered. /tags Show information about tags. No arguments are accepted. The tags template is rendered. TECHNICAL IMPLEMENTATION TOPICS To access a subtopic, use "hg help internals.{subtopic-name}" bid-merge Bid Merge Algorithm bundle2 Bundle2 bundles Bundles cbor CBOR censor Censor changegroups Changegroups config Config Registrar dirstate-v2 dirstate-v2 file format extensions Extension API mergestate Mergestate requirements Repository Requirements revlogs Revision Logs wireprotocol Wire Protocol wireprotocolrpc Wire Protocol RPC wireprotocolv2 Wire Protocol Version 2 MERGE TOOLS To merge files Mercurial uses merge tools. A merge tool combines two different versions of a file into a merged file. Merge tools are given the two files and the greatest common ancestor of the two file versions, so they can determine the changes made on both branches. Merge tools are used both for hg resolve, hg merge, hg update, hg backout and in several ex‐ tensions. Usually, the merge tool tries to automatically reconcile the files by combining all non-over‐ lapping changes that occurred separately in the two different evolutions of the same initial base file. Furthermore, some interactive merge programs make it easier to manually resolve conflicting merges, either in a graphical way, or by inserting some conflict markers. Mercu‐ rial does not include any interactive merge programs but relies on external tools for that. Available merge tools External merge tools and their properties are configured in the merge-tools configuration section - see hgrc(5) - but they can often just be named by their executable. A merge tool is generally usable if its executable can be found on the system and if it can handle the merge. The executable is found if it is an absolute or relative executable path or the name of an application in the executable search path. The tool is assumed to be able to handle the merge if it can handle symlinks if the file is a symlink, if it can handle binary files if the file is binary, and if a GUI is available if the tool requires a GUI. There are some internal merge tools which can be used. The internal merge tools are: :dump Creates three versions of the files to merge, containing the contents of local, other and base. These files can then be used to perform a merge manually. If the file to be merged is named a.txt, these files will accordingly be named a.txt.local, a.txt.other and a.txt.base and they will be placed in the same directory as a.txt. This implies premerge. Therefore, files aren't dumped, if premerge runs successfully. Use :forcedump to forcibly write files out. (actual capabilities: binary, symlink) :fail Rather than attempting to merge files that were modified on both branches, it marks them as unresolved. The resolve command must be used to resolve these conflicts. (actual capabilities: binary, symlink) :forcedump Creates three versions of the files as same as :dump, but omits premerge. (actual capabilities: binary, symlink) :local Uses the local p1() version of files as the merged version. (actual capabilities: binary, symlink) :merge Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for merging files. It will fail if there are any conflicts and leave markers in the partially merged file. Mark‐ ers will have two sections, one for each side of merge. :merge-local Like :merge, but resolve all conflicts non-interactively in favor of the local p1() changes. :merge-other Like :merge, but resolve all conflicts non-interactively in favor of the other p2() changes. :merge3 Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for merging files. It will fail if there are any conflicts and leave markers in the partially merged file. Marker will have three sections, one from each side of the merge and one for the base con‐ tent. :mergediff Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for merging files. It will fail if there are any conflicts and leave markers in the partially merged file. The marker will have two sections, one with the content from one side of the merge, and one with a diff from the base content to the content on the other side. (experimental) :other Uses the other p2() version of files as the merged version. (actual capabilities: binary, symlink) :prompt Asks the user which of the local p1() or the other p2() version to keep as the merged version. (actual capabilities: binary, symlink) :tagmerge Uses the internal tag merge algorithm (experimental). :union Uses the internal non-interactive simple merge algorithm for merging files. It will use both left and right sides for conflict regions. No markers are inserted. Internal tools are always available and do not require a GUI but will by default not handle symlinks or binary files. See next section for detail about "actual capabilities" described above. Choosing a merge tool Mercurial uses these rules when deciding which merge tool to use: 1. If a tool has been specified with the --tool option to merge or resolve, it is used. If it is the name of a tool in the merge-tools configuration, its configuration is used. Oth‐ erwise the specified tool must be executable by the shell. 2. If the HGMERGE environment variable is present, its value is used and must be executable by the shell. 3. If the filename of the file to be merged matches any of the patterns in the merge-patterns configuration section, the first usable merge tool corresponding to a matching pattern is used. 4. If ui.merge is set it will be considered next. If the value is not the name of a config‐ ured tool, the specified value is used and must be executable by the shell. Otherwise the named tool is used if it is usable. 5. If any usable merge tools are present in the merge-tools configuration section, the one with the highest priority is used. 6. If a program named hgmerge can be found on the system, it is used - but it will by default not be used for symlinks and binary files. 7. If the file to be merged is not binary and is not a symlink, then internal :merge is used. 8. Otherwise, :prompt is used. For historical reason, Mercurial treats merge tools as below while examining rules above. ┌───────────┬────────────────┬────────┬─────────┐ │step │ specified via │ binary │ symlink │ ├───────────┼────────────────┼────────┼─────────┤ │ │ --tool │ o/o │ o/o │ │ 1. │ │ │ │ ├───────────┼────────────────┼────────┼─────────┤ │ │ HGMERGE │ o/o │ o/o │ │ 2. │ │ │ │ ├───────────┼────────────────┼────────┼─────────┤ │ │ merge-patterns │ o/o(*) │ x/?(*) │ │ 3. │ │ │ │ ├───────────┼────────────────┼────────┼─────────┤ │ │ ui.merge │ x/?(*) │ x/?(*) │ │ 4. │ │ │ │ └───────────┴────────────────┴────────┴─────────┘ Each capability column indicates Mercurial behavior for internal/external merge tools at ex‐ amining each rule. • "o": "assume that a tool has capability" • "x": "assume that a tool does not have capability" • "?": "check actual capability of a tool" If merge.strict-capability-check configuration is true, Mercurial checks capabilities of merge tools strictly in (*) cases above (= each capability column becomes "?/?"). It is false by default for backward compatibility. Note After selecting a merge program, Mercurial will by default attempt to merge the files using a simple merge algorithm first. Only if it doesn't succeed because of conflict‐ ing changes will Mercurial actually execute the merge program. Whether to use the sim‐ ple merge algorithm first can be controlled by the premerge setting of the merge tool. Premerge is enabled by default unless the file is binary or a symlink. See the merge-tools and ui sections of hgrc(5) for details on the configuration of merge tools. PAGER SUPPORT Some Mercurial commands can produce a lot of output, and Mercurial will attempt to use a pager to make those commands more pleasant. To set the pager that should be used, set the application variable: [pager] pager = less -FRX If no pager is set in the user or repository configuration, Mercurial uses the environment variable $PAGER. If $PAGER is not set, pager.pager from the default or system configuration is used. If none of these are set, a default pager will be used, typically less on Unix and more on Windows. On Windows, more is not color aware, so using it effectively disables color. MSYS and Cygwin shells provide less as a pager, which can be configured to support ANSI color codes. See hg help config.color.pagermode to configure the color mode when invoking a pager. You can disable the pager for certain commands by adding them to the pager.ignore list: [pager] ignore = version, help, update To ignore global commands like hg version or hg help, you have to specify them in your user configuration file. To control whether the pager is used at all for an individual command, you can use --pager=<value>: • use as needed: auto. • require the pager: yes or on. • suppress the pager: no or off (any unrecognized value will also work). To globally turn off all attempts to use a pager, set: [ui] paginate = never which will prevent the pager from running. FILE NAME PATTERNS Mercurial accepts several notations for identifying one or more files at a time. By default, Mercurial treats filenames verbatim without pattern matching, relative to the current working directory. Note that your system shell might perform pattern matching of its own before passing filenames into Mercurial. Alternate pattern notations must be specified explicitly. Note Patterns specified in .hgignore are not rooted. Please see hg help hgignore for de‐ tails. To use a plain path name without any pattern matching, start it with path:. These path names must completely match starting at the current repository root, and when the path points to a directory, it is matched recursively. To match all files in a directory non-recursively (not including any files in subdirectories), rootfilesin: can be used, specifying an absolute path (relative to the repository root). To use an extended glob, start a name with glob:. Globs are rooted at the current directory; a glob such as *.c will only match files in the current directory ending with .c. rootglob: can be used instead of glob: for a glob that is rooted at the root of the repository. The supported glob syntax extensions are ** to match any string across path separators and {a,b} to mean "a or b". To use a Perl/Python regular expression, start a name with re:. Regexp pattern matching is anchored at the root of the repository. To read name patterns from a file, use listfile: or listfile0:. The latter expects null de‐ limited patterns while the former expects line feeds. Each string read from the file is it‐ self treated as a file pattern. To read a set of patterns from a file, use include: or subinclude:. include: will use all the patterns from the given file and treat them as if they had been passed in manually. subinclude: will only apply the patterns against files that are under the subinclude file's directory. See hg help hgignore for details on the format of these files. All patterns, except for glob: specified in command line (not for -I or -X options), can match also against directories: files under matched directories are treated as matched. For -I and -X options, glob: will match directories recursively. Plain examples: path:foo/bar a name bar in a directory named foo in the root of the repository path:path:name a file or directory named "path:name" rootfilesin:foo/bar the files in a directory called foo/bar, but not any files in its subdirectories and not a file bar in directory foo Glob examples: glob:*.c any name ending in ".c" in the current directory *.c any name ending in ".c" in the current directory **.c any name ending in ".c" in any subdirectory of the current directory including itself. foo/* any file in directory foo foo/** any file in directory foo plus all its subdirectories, recursively foo/*.c any name ending in ".c" in the directory foo foo/**.c any name ending in ".c" in any subdirectory of foo including itself. rootglob:*.c any name ending in ".c" in the root of the repository Regexp examples: re:.*\.c$ any name ending in ".c", anywhere in the repository File examples: listfile:list.txt read list from list.txt with one file pattern per line listfile0:list.txt read list from list.txt with null byte delimiters See also hg help filesets. Include examples: include:path/to/mypatternfile reads patterns to be applied to all paths subinclude:path/to/subignorefile reads patterns specifically for paths in the subdirectory WORKING WITH PHASES What are phases? Phases are a system for tracking which changesets have been or should be shared. This helps prevent common mistakes when modifying history (for instance, with the mq or rebase exten‐ sions). Each changeset in a repository is in one of the following phases: • public : changeset is visible on a public server • draft : changeset is not yet published • secret : changeset should not be pushed, pulled, or cloned These phases are ordered (public < draft < secret) and no changeset can be in a lower phase than its ancestors. For instance, if a changeset is public, all its ancestors are also pub‐ lic. Lastly, changeset phases should only be changed towards the public phase. How are phases managed? For the most part, phases should work transparently. By default, a changeset is created in the draft phase and is moved into the public phase when it is pushed to another repository. Once changesets become public, extensions like mq and rebase will refuse to operate on them to prevent creating duplicate changesets. Phases can also be manually manipulated with the hg phase command if needed. See hg help -v phase for examples. To make your commits secret by default, put this in your configuration file: [phases] new-commit = secret Phases and servers Normally, all servers are publishing by default. This means: - all draft changesets that are pulled or cloned appear in phase public on the client - all draft changesets that are pushed appear as public on both client and server - secret changesets are neither pushed, pulled, or cloned Note Pulling a draft changeset from a publishing server does not mark it as public on the server side due to the read-only nature of pull. Sometimes it may be desirable to push and pull changesets in the draft phase to share unfin‐ ished work. This can be done by setting a repository to disable publishing in its configura‐ tion file: [phases] publish = False See hg help config for more information on configuration files. Note Servers running older versions of Mercurial are treated as publishing. Note Changesets in secret phase are not exchanged with the server. This applies to their content: file names, file contents, and changeset metadata. For technical reasons, the identifier (e.g. d825e4025e39) of the secret changeset may be communicated to the server. Examples • list changesets in draft or secret phase: hg log -r "not public()" • change all secret changesets to draft: hg phase --draft "secret()" • forcibly move the current changeset and descendants from public to draft: hg phase --force --draft . • show a list of changeset revisions and each corresponding phase: hg log --template "{rev} {phase}\n" • resynchronize draft changesets relative to a remote repository: hg phase -fd "outgoing(URL)" See hg help phase for more information on manually manipulating phases. SPECIFYING REVISIONS Mercurial supports several ways to specify revisions. Specifying single revisions A plain integer is treated as a revision number. Negative integers are treated as sequential offsets from the tip, with -1 denoting the tip, -2 denoting the revision prior to the tip, and so forth. A 40-digit hexadecimal string is treated as a unique revision identifier. A hexadecimal string less than 40 characters long is treated as a unique revision identifier and is re‐ ferred to as a short-form identifier. A short-form identifier is only valid if it is the pre‐ fix of exactly one full-length identifier. Any other string is treated as a bookmark, tag, or branch name. A bookmark is a movable pointer to a revision. A tag is a permanent name associated with a revision. A branch name denotes the tipmost open branch head of that branch - or if they are all closed, the tipmost closed head of the branch. Bookmark, tag, and branch names must not contain the ":" charac‐ ter. The reserved name "tip" always identifies the most recent revision. The reserved name "null" indicates the null revision. This is the revision of an empty repos‐ itory, and the parent of revision 0. The reserved name "." indicates the working directory parent. If no working directory is checked out, it is equivalent to null. If an uncommitted merge is in progress, "." is the re‐ vision of the first parent. Finally, commands that expect a single revision (like hg update) also accept revsets (see be‐ low for details). When given a revset, they use the last revision of the revset. A few com‐ mands accept two single revisions (like hg diff). When given a revset, they use the first and the last revisions of the revset. Specifying multiple revisions Mercurial supports a functional language for selecting a set of revisions. Expressions in this language are called revsets. The language supports a number of predicates which are joined by infix operators. Parenthesis can be used for grouping. Identifiers such as branch names may need quoting with single or double quotes if they con‐ tain characters like - or if they match one of the predefined predicates. Special characters can be used in quoted identifiers by escaping them, e.g., \n is inter‐ preted as a newline. To prevent them from being interpreted, strings can be prefixed with r, e.g. r'...'. Operators There is a single prefix operator: not x Changesets not in x. Short form is ! x. These are the supported infix operators: x::y A DAG range, meaning all changesets that are descendants of x and ancestors of y, in‐ cluding x and y themselves. If the first endpoint is left out, this is equivalent to ancestors(y), if the second is left out it is equivalent to descendants(x). An alternative syntax is x..y. x:y All changesets with revision numbers between x and y, both inclusive. Either endpoint can be left out, they default to 0 and tip. x and y The intersection of changesets in x and y. Short form is x & y. x or y The union of changesets in x and y. There are two alternative short forms: x | y and x + y. x - y Changesets in x but not in y. x % y Changesets that are ancestors of x but not ancestors of y (i.e. ::x - ::y). This is shorthand notation for only(x, y) (see below). The second argument is optional and, if left out, is equivalent to only(x). x^n The nth parent of x, n == 0, 1, or 2. For n == 0, x; for n == 1, the first parent of each changeset in x; for n == 2, the second parent of changeset in x. x~n The nth first ancestor of x; x~0 is x; x~3 is x^^^. For n < 0, the nth unambiguous descendent of x. x ## y Concatenate strings and identifiers into one string. All other prefix, infix and postfix operators have lower priority than ##. For exam‐ ple, a1 ## a2~2 is equivalent to (a1 ## a2)~2. For example: [revsetalias] issue(a1) = grep(r'\bissue[ :]?' ## a1 ## r'\b|\bbug\(' ## a1 ## r'\)') issue(1234) is equivalent to grep(r'\bissue[ :]?1234\b|\bbug\(1234\)') in this case. This matches against all of "issue 1234", "issue:1234", "issue1234" and "bug(1234)". There is a single postfix operator: x^ Equivalent to x^1, the first parent of each changeset in x. Patterns Where noted, predicates that perform string matching can accept a pattern string. The pattern may be either a literal, or a regular expression. If the pattern starts with re:, the remain‐ der of the pattern is treated as a regular expression. Otherwise, it is treated as a literal. To match a pattern that actually starts with re:, use the prefix literal:. Matching is case-sensitive, unless otherwise noted. To perform a case- insensitive match on a case-sensitive predicate, use a regular expression, prefixed with (?i). For example, tag(r're:(?i)release') matches "release" or "RELEASE" or "Release", etc. Predicates The following predicates are supported: adds(pattern) Changesets that add a file matching pattern. The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be relative to the current directory and match against a file or a directory. all() All changesets, the same as 0:tip. ancestor(*changeset) A greatest common ancestor of the changesets. Accepts 0 or more changesets. Will return empty list when passed no args. Greatest common ancestor of a single changeset is that changeset. ancestors(set[, depth]) Changesets that are ancestors of changesets in set, including the given changesets themselves. If depth is specified, the result only includes changesets up to the specified genera‐ tion. author(string) Alias for user(string). bisect(string) Changesets marked in the specified bisect status: • good, bad, skip: csets explicitly marked as good/bad/skip • goods, bads : csets topologically good/bad • range : csets taking part in the bisection • pruned : csets that are goods, bads or skipped • untested : csets whose fate is yet unknown • ignored : csets ignored due to DAG topology • current : the cset currently being bisected bookmark([name]) The named bookmark or all bookmarks. Pattern matching is supported for name. See hg help revisions.patterns. branch(string or set) All changesets belonging to the given branch or the branches of the given changesets. Pattern matching is supported for string. See hg help revisions.patterns. branchpoint() Changesets with more than one child. bundle() Changesets in the bundle. Bundle must be specified by the -R option. children(set) Child changesets of changesets in set. closed() Changeset is closed. commonancestors(set) Changesets that are ancestors of every changeset in set. conflictlocal() The local side of the merge, if currently in an unresolved merge. "merge" here includes merge conflicts from e.g. 'hg rebase' or 'hg graft'. conflictother() The other side of the merge, if currently in an unresolved merge. "merge" here includes merge conflicts from e.g. 'hg rebase' or 'hg graft'. contains(pattern) The revision's manifest contains a file matching pattern (but might not modify it). See hg help patterns for information about file patterns. The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be relative to the current directory and match against a file exactly for efficiency. converted([id]) Changesets converted from the given identifier in the old repository if present, or all converted changesets if no identifier is specified. date(interval) Changesets within the interval, see hg help dates. desc(string) Search commit message for string. The match is case-insensitive. Pattern matching is supported for string. See hg help revisions.patterns. descendants(set[, depth]) Changesets which are descendants of changesets in set, including the given changesets themselves. If depth is specified, the result only includes changesets up to the specified genera‐ tion. destination([set]) Changesets that were created by a graft, transplant or rebase operation, with the given revisions specified as the source. Omitting the optional set is the same as passing all(). diffcontains(pattern) Search revision differences for when the pattern was added or removed. The pattern may be a substring literal or a regular expression. See hg help revi‐‐ sions.patterns. draft() Changeset in draft phase. expectsize(set[, size]) Return the given revset if size matches the revset size. Abort if the revset doesn't expect given size. size can either be an integer range or an integer. For example, expectsize(0:1, 3:5) will abort as revset size is 2 and 2 is not between 3 and 5 inclusive. extra(label, [value]) Changesets with the given label in the extra metadata, with the given optional value. Pattern matching is supported for value. See hg help revisions.patterns. file(pattern) Changesets affecting files matched by pattern. For a faster but less accurate result, consider using filelog() instead. This predicate uses glob: as the default kind of pattern. filelog(pattern) Changesets connected to the specified filelog. For performance reasons, visits only revisions mentioned in the file-level filelog, rather than filtering through all changesets (much faster, but doesn't include deletes or duplicate changes). For a slower, more accurate result, use file(). The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be relative to the current directory and match against a file exactly for efficiency. first(set, [n]) An alias for limit(). follow([file[, startrev]]) An alias for ::. (ancestors of the working directory's first parent). If file pattern is specified, the histories of files matching given pattern in the revision given by startrev are followed, including copies. followlines(file, fromline:toline[, startrev=., descend=False]) Changesets modifying file in line range ('fromline', 'toline'). Line range corresponds to 'file' content at 'startrev' and should hence be consistent with file size. If startrev is not specified, working directory's parent is used. By default, ancestors of 'startrev' are returned. If 'descend' is True, descendants of 'startrev' are returned though renames are (currently) not followed in this direction. grep(regex) Like keyword(string) but accepts a regex. Use grep(r'...') to ensure special escape characters are handled correctly. Unlike keyword(string), the match is case-sensitive. head() Changeset is a named branch head. heads(set) Members of set with no children in set. hidden() Hidden changesets. id(string) Revision non-ambiguously specified by the given hex string prefix. keyword(string) Search commit message, user name, and names of changed files for string. The match is case-insensitive. For a regular expression or case sensitive search of these fields, use grep(regex). last(set, [n]) Last n members of set, defaulting to 1. limit(set[, n[, offset]]) First n members of set, defaulting to 1, starting from offset. matching(revision [, field]) Changesets in which a given set of fields match the set of fields in the selected re‐ vision or set. To match more than one field pass the list of fields to match separated by spaces (e.g. author description). Valid fields are most regular revision fields and some special fields. Regular revision fields are description, author, branch, date, files, phase, parents, substate, user and diff. Note that author and user are synonyms. diff refers to the contents of the revision. Two revisions matching their diff will also match their files. Special fields are summary and metadata: summary matches the first line of the de‐ scription. metadata is equivalent to matching description user date (i.e. it matches the main metadata fields). metadata is the default field which is used when no fields are specified. You can match more than one field at a time. max(set) Changeset with highest revision number in set. merge() Changeset is a merge changeset. min(set) Changeset with lowest revision number in set. modifies(pattern) Changesets modifying files matched by pattern. The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be relative to the current directory and match against a file or a directory. named(namespace) The changesets in a given namespace. Pattern matching is supported for namespace. See hg help revisions.patterns. nodefromfile(path) An alias for ::. (ancestors of the working directory's first parent). If file pattern is specified, the histories of files matching given pattern in the revision given by startrev are followed, including copies. none() No changesets. only(set, [set]) Changesets that are ancestors of the first set that are not ancestors of any other head in the repo. If a second set is specified, the result is ancestors of the first set that are not ancestors of the second set (i.e. ::<set1> - ::<set2>). origin([set]) Changesets that were specified as a source for the grafts, transplants or rebases that created the given revisions. Omitting the optional set is the same as passing all(). If a changeset created by these operations is itself specified as a source for one of these operations, only the source changeset for the first operation is selected. outgoing([path]) Changesets not found in the specified destination repository, or the default push lo‐ cation. If the location resolve to multiple repositories, the union of all outgoing changeset will be used. p1([set]) First parent of changesets in set, or the working directory. p2([set]) Second parent of changesets in set, or the working directory. parents([set]) The set of all parents for all changesets in set, or the working directory. present(set) An empty set, if any revision in set isn't found; otherwise, all revisions in set. If any of specified revisions is not present in the local repository, the query is normally aborted. But this predicate allows the query to continue even in such cases. public() Changeset in public phase. remote([id [,path]]) Local revision that corresponds to the given identifier in a remote repository, if present. Here, the '.' identifier is a synonym for the current local branch. removes(pattern) Changesets which remove files matching pattern. The pattern without explicit kind like glob: is expected to be relative to the current directory and match against a file or a directory. rev(number) Revision with the given numeric identifier. reverse(set) Reverse order of set. revset(set) Strictly interpret the content as a revset. The content of this special predicate will be strictly interpreted as a revset. For example, revset(id(0)) will be interpreted as "id(0)" without possible ambiguity with a "id(0)" bookmark or tag. roots(set) Changesets in set with no parent changeset in set. secret() Changeset in secret phase. sort(set[, [-]key... [, ...]]) Sort set by keys. The default sort order is ascending, specify a key as -key to sort in descending order. The keys can be: • rev for the revision number, • branch for the branch name, • desc for the commit message (description), • user for user name (author can be used as an alias), • date for the commit date • topo for a reverse topographical sort • node the nodeid of the revision The topo sort order cannot be combined with other sort keys. This sort takes one op‐ tional argument, topo.firstbranch, which takes a revset that specifies what topograph‐ ical branches to prioritize in the sort. subrepo([pattern]) Changesets that add, modify or remove the given subrepo. If no subrepo pattern is named, any subrepo changes are returned. tag([name]) The specified tag by name, or all tagged revisions if no name is given. Pattern matching is supported for name. See hg help revisions.patterns. user(string) User name contains string. The match is case-insensitive. Pattern matching is supported for string. See hg help revisions.patterns. Aliases New predicates (known as "aliases") can be defined, using any combination of existing predi‐ cates or other aliases. An alias definition looks like: <alias> = <definition> in the revsetalias section of a Mercurial configuration file. Arguments of the form a1, a2, etc. are substituted from the alias into the definition. For example, [revsetalias] h = heads() d(s) = sort(s, date) rs(s, k) = reverse(sort(s, k)) defines three aliases, h, d, and rs. rs(0:tip, author) is exactly equivalent to re‐‐ verse(sort(0:tip, author)). Equivalents Command line equivalents for hg log: -f -> ::. -d x -> date(x) -k x -> keyword(x) -m -> merge() -u x -> user(x) -b x -> branch(x) -P x -> !::x -l x -> limit(expr, x) Examples Some sample queries: • Changesets on the default branch: hg log -r "branch(default)" • Changesets on the default branch since tag 1.5 (excluding merges): hg log -r "branch(default) and 1.5:: and not merge()" • Open branch heads: hg log -r "head() and not closed()" • Changesets between tags 1.3 and 1.5 mentioning "bug" that affect hgext/*: hg log -r "1.3::1.5 and keyword(bug) and file('hgext/*')" • Changesets committed in May 2008, sorted by user: hg log -r "sort(date('May 2008'), user)" • Changesets mentioning "bug" or "issue" that are not in a tagged release: hg log -r "(keyword(bug) or keyword(issue)) and not ancestors(tag())" • Update to the commit that bookmark @ is pointing to, without activating the bookmark (this works because the last revision of the revset is used): hg update :@ • Show diff between tags 1.3 and 1.5 (this works because the first and the last revisions of the revset are used): hg diff -r 1.3::1.5 RUST IN MERCURIAL Mercurial can be augmented with Rust extensions for speeding up certain operations. Compatibility Though the Rust extensions are only tested by the project under Linux, users of MacOS, Free‐ BSD and other UNIX-likes have been using the Rust extensions. Your mileage may vary, but by all means do give us feedback or signal your interest for better support. No Rust extensions are available for Windows at this time. Features The following operations are sped up when using Rust: • discovery of differences between repositories (pull/push) • nodemap (see hg help config.format.use-persistent-nodemap) • all commands using the dirstate (status, commit, diff, add, update, etc.) • dirstate-v2 (see hg help config.format.use-dirstate-v2) • iteration over ancestors in a graph More features are in the works, and improvements on the above listed are still in progress. For more experimental work see the "rhg" section. Checking for Rust You may already have the Rust extensions depending on how you install Mercurial. $ hg debuginstall | grep -i rust checking Rust extensions (installed) checking module pol‐ icy (rust+c-allow) If those lines don't even exist, you're using an old version of hg which does not have any Rust extensions yet. Installing You will need cargo to be in your $PATH. See the "MSRV" section for which version to use. Using pip Users of pip can install the Rust extensions with the following command: $ pip install mercurial --global-option --rust --no-use-pep517 --no-use-pep517 is here to tell pip to preserve backwards compatibility with the legacy setup.py system. Mercurial has not yet migrated its complex setup to the new system, so we still need this to add compiled extensions. This might take a couple of minutes because you're compiling everything. See the "Checking for Rust" section to see if the install succeeded. From your distribution Some distributions are shipping Mercurial with Rust extensions enabled and pre-compiled (meaning you won't have to install cargo), or allow you to specify an install flag. Check with your specific distribution for how to do that, or ask their team to add support for hg+Rust! From source Please refer to the rust/README.rst file in the Mercurial repository for instructions on how to install from source. MSRV The minimum supported Rust version is currently 1.48.0. The project's policy is to follow the version from Debian stable, to make the distributions' job easier. rhg There exists an experimental pure-Rust version of Mercurial called rhg with a fallback mecha‐ nism for unsupported invocations. It allows for much faster execution of certain commands while adding no discernable overhead for the rest. The only way of trying it out is by building it from source. Please refer to rust/README.rst in the Mercurial repository. Contributing If you would like to help the Rust endeavor, please refer to rust/README.rst in the Mercurial repository. USING MERCURIAL FROM SCRIPTS AND AUTOMATION It is common for machines (as opposed to humans) to consume Mercurial. This help topic de‐ scribes some of the considerations for interfacing machines with Mercurial. Choosing an Interface Machines have a choice of several methods to interface with Mercurial. These include: • Executing the hg process • Querying a HTTP server • Calling out to a command server Executing hg processes is very similar to how humans interact with Mercurial in the shell. It should already be familiar to you. hg serve can be used to start a server. By default, this will start a "hgweb" HTTP server. This HTTP server has support for machine-readable output, such as JSON. For more, see hg help hgweb. hg serve can also start a "command server." Clients can connect to this server and issue Mer‐ curial commands over a special protocol. For more details on the command server, including links to client libraries, see https://www.mercurial-scm.org/wiki/CommandServer. hg serve based interfaces (the hgweb and command servers) have the advantage over simple hg process invocations in that they are likely more efficient. This is because there is signifi‐ cant overhead to spawn new Python processes. Tip If you need to invoke several hg processes in short order and/or performance is impor‐ tant to you, use of a server-based interface is highly recommended. Environment Variables As documented in hg help environment, various environment variables influence the operation of Mercurial. The following are particularly relevant for machines consuming Mercurial: HGPLAIN If not set, Mercurial's output could be influenced by configuration settings that im‐ pact its encoding, verbose mode, localization, etc. It is highly recommended for machines to set this variable when invoking hg processes. HGENCODING If not set, the locale used by Mercurial will be detected from the environment. If the determined locale does not support display of certain characters, Mercurial may render these character sequences incorrectly (often by using "?" as a placeholder for invalid characters in the current locale). Explicitly setting this environment variable is a good practice to guarantee consis‐ tent results. "utf-8" is a good choice on UNIX-like environments. HGRCPATH If not set, Mercurial will inherit config options from config files using the process described in hg help config. This includes inheriting user or system-wide config files. When utmost control over the Mercurial configuration is desired, the value of HGRCPATH can be set to an explicit file with known good configs. In rare cases, the value can be set to an empty file or the null device (often /dev/null) to bypass loading of any user or system config files. Note that these approaches can have unintended conse‐ quences, as the user and system config files often define things like the username and extensions that may be required to interface with a repository. HGRCSKIPREPO When set, the .hg/hgrc from repositories are not read. Note that not reading the repository's configuration can have unintended consequences, as the repository config files can define things like extensions that are required for access to the repository. Command-line Flags Mercurial's default command-line parser is designed for humans, and is not robust against ma‐ licious input. For instance, you can start a debugger by passing --debugger as an option value: $ REV=--debugger sh -c 'hg log -r "$REV"' This happens because several command-line flags need to be scanned without using a concrete command table, which may be modified while loading repository settings and extensions. Since Mercurial 4.4.2, the parsing of such flags may be restricted by setting HG‐‐ PLAIN=+strictflags. When this feature is enabled, all early options (e.g. -R/--repository, --cwd, --config) must be specified first amongst the other global options, and cannot be in‐ jected to an arbitrary location: $ HGPLAIN=+strictflags hg -R "$REPO" log -r "$REV" In earlier Mercurial versions where +strictflags isn't available, you can mitigate the issue by concatenating an option value with its flag: $ hg log -r"$REV" --keyword="$KEYWORD" Consuming Command Output It is common for machines to need to parse the output of Mercurial commands for relevant data. This section describes the various techniques for doing so. Parsing Raw Command Output Likely the simplest and most effective solution for consuming command output is to simply in‐ voke hg commands as you would as a user and parse their output. The output of many commands can easily be parsed with tools like grep, sed, and awk. A potential downside with parsing command output is that the output of commands can change when Mercurial is upgraded. While Mercurial does generally strive for strong backwards com‐ patibility, command output does occasionally change. Having tests for your automated interac‐ tions with hg commands is generally recommended, but is even more important when raw command output parsing is involved. Using Templates to Control Output Many hg commands support templatized output via the -T/--template argument. For more, see hg help templates. Templates are useful for explicitly controlling output so that you get exactly the data you want formatted how you want it. For example, log -T {node}\n can be used to print a newline delimited list of changeset nodes instead of a human-tailored output containing authors, dates, descriptions, etc. Tip If parsing raw command output is too complicated, consider using templates to make your life easier. The -T/--template argument allows specifying pre-defined styles. Mercurial ships with the machine-readable styles cbor, json, and xml, which provide CBOR, JSON, and XML output, re‐ spectively. These are useful for producing output that is machine readable as-is. (Mercurial 5.0 is required for CBOR style.) Important The json and xml styles are considered experimental. While they may be attractive to use for easily obtaining machine-readable output, their behavior may change in subse‐ quent versions. These styles may also exhibit unexpected results when dealing with certain encodings. Mercurial treats things like filenames as a series of bytes and normalizing certain byte sequences to JSON or XML with certain encoding settings can lead to surprises. Command Server Output If using the command server to interact with Mercurial, you are likely using an existing li‐ brary/API that abstracts implementation details of the command server. If so, this interface layer may perform parsing for you, saving you the work of implementing it yourself. Output Verbosity Commands often have varying output verbosity, even when machine readable styles are being used (e.g. -T json). Adding -v/--verbose and --debug to the command's arguments can increase the amount of data exposed by Mercurial. An alternate way to get the data you need is by explicitly specifying a template. Other Topics revsets Revisions sets is a functional query language for selecting a set of revisions. Think of it as SQL for Mercurial repositories. Revsets are useful for querying repositories for specific data. See hg help revsets for more. share extension The share extension provides functionality for sharing repository data across several working copies. It can even automatically "pool" storage for logically related reposi‐ tories when cloning. Configuring the share extension can lead to significant resource utilization reduc‐ tion, particularly around disk space and the network. This is especially true for con‐ tinuous integration (CI) environments. See hg help -e share for more. SUBREPOSITORIES Subrepositories let you nest external repositories or projects into a parent Mercurial repos‐ itory, and make commands operate on them as a group. Mercurial currently supports Mercurial, Git, and Subversion subrepositories. Subrepositories are made of three components: 1. Nested repository checkouts. They can appear anywhere in the parent working directory. 2. Nested repository references. They are defined in .hgsub, which should be placed in the root of working directory, and tell where the subrepository checkouts come from. Mercurial subrepositories are referenced like: path/to/nested = https://example.com/nested/repo/path Git and Subversion subrepos are also supported: path/to/nested = [git]git://example.com/nested/repo/path path/to/nested = [svn]https://example.com/nested/trunk/path where path/to/nested is the checkout location relatively to the parent Mercurial root, and https://example.com/nested/repo/path is the source repository path. The source can also reference a filesystem path. Note that .hgsub does not exist by default in Mercurial repositories, you have to create and add it to the parent repository before using subrepositories. 3. Nested repository states. They are defined in .hgsubstate, which is placed in the root of working directory, and capture whatever information is required to restore the subreposi‐ tories to the state they were committed in a parent repository changeset. Mercurial auto‐ matically record the nested repositories states when committing in the parent repository. Note The .hgsubstate file should not be edited manually. Adding a Subrepository If .hgsub does not exist, create it and add it to the parent repository. Clone or checkout the external projects where you want it to live in the parent repository. Edit .hgsub and add the subrepository entry as described above. At this point, the subrepository is tracked and the next commit will record its state in .hgsubstate and bind it to the committed changeset. Synchronizing a Subrepository Subrepos do not automatically track the latest changeset of their sources. Instead, they are updated to the changeset that corresponds with the changeset checked out in the top-level changeset. This is so developers always get a consistent set of compatible code and libraries when they update. Thus, updating subrepos is a manual process. Simply check out target subrepo at the desired revision, test in the top-level repo, then commit in the parent repository to record the new combination. Deleting a Subrepository To remove a subrepository from the parent repository, delete its reference from .hgsub, then remove its files. Interaction with Mercurial Commands add add does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is specified. However, if you specify the full path of a file in a subrepo, it will be added even without -S/--sub‐ repos specified. Subversion subrepositories are currently silently ignored. addremove addremove does not recurse into subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is specified. However, if you specify the full path of a directory in a subrepo, addremove will be performed on it even without -S/--subrepos being specified. Git and Subversion subrepositories will print a warning and continue. archive archive does not recurse in subrepositories unless -S/--subrepos is specified. cat Git subrepositories only support exact file matches. Subversion subrepositories are currently ignored. commit commit creates a consistent snapshot of the state of the entire project and its sub‐ repositories. If any subrepositories have been modified, Mercurial will abort. Mercu‐ rial can be made to instead commit all modified subrepositories by specifying -S/--subrepos, or setting "ui.commitsubrepos=True" in a configuration file (see hg help config). After there are no longer any modified subrepositories, it records their state and finally commits it in the parent repository. The --addremove option also honors the -S/--subrepos option. However, Git and Subversion subrepositories will print a warning and abort. diff diff does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is specified. However, if you specify the full path of a file or directory in a subrepo, it will be diffed even without -S/--subrepos being specified. Subversion subrepositories are currently silently ignored. files files does not recurse into subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is specified. However, if you specify the full path of a file or directory in a subrepo, it will be displayed even without -S/--subrepos being specified. Git and Subversion subrepositories are currently silently ignored. forget forget currently only handles exact file matches in subrepos. Git and Subversion sub‐ repositories are currently silently ignored. incoming incoming does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is specified. Git and Sub‐ version subrepositories are currently silently ignored. outgoing outgoing does not recurse in subrepos unless -S/--subrepos is specified. Git and Sub‐ version subrepositories are currently silently ignored. pull pull is not recursive since it is not clear what to pull prior to running hg update. Listing and retrieving all subrepositories changes referenced by the parent repository pulled changesets is expensive at best, impossible in the Subversion case. push Mercurial will automatically push all subrepositories first when the parent repository is being pushed. This ensures new subrepository changes are available when referenced by top-level repositories. Push is a no-op for Subversion subrepositories. serve serve does not recurse into subrepositories unless -S/--subrepos is specified. Git and Subversion subrepositories are currently silently ignored. status status does not recurse into subrepositories unless -S/--subrepos is specified. Sub‐ repository changes are displayed as regular Mercurial changes on the subrepository el‐ ements. Subversion subrepositories are currently silently ignored. remove remove does not recurse into subrepositories unless -S/--subrepos is specified. How‐ ever, if you specify a file or directory path in a subrepo, it will be removed even without -S/--subrepos. Git and Subversion subrepositories are currently silently ig‐ nored. update update restores the subrepos in the state they were originally committed in target changeset. If the recorded changeset is not available in the current subrepository, Mercurial will pull it in first before updating. This means that updating can require network access when using subrepositories. Remapping Subrepositories Sources A subrepository source location may change during a project life, invalidating references stored in the parent repository history. To fix this, rewriting rules can be defined in par‐ ent repository hgrc file or in Mercurial configuration. See the [subpaths] section in hgrc(5) for more details. TEMPLATE USAGE Mercurial allows you to customize output of commands through templates. You can either pass in a template or select an existing template-style from the command line, via the --template option. You can customize output for any "log-like" command: log, outgoing, incoming, tip, parents, and heads. Some built-in styles are packaged with Mercurial. These can be listed with hg log --template list. Example usage: $ hg log -r1.0::1.1 --template changelog A template is a piece of text, with markup to invoke variable expansion: $ hg log -r1 --template "{node}\n" b56ce7b07c52de7d5fd79fb89701ea538af65746 Keywords Strings in curly braces are called keywords. The availability of keywords depends on the ex‐ act context of the templater. These keywords are usually available for templating a log-like command: _fast_rank the rank of a changeset if cached The rank of a revision is the size of the sub-graph it defines as a head. Equiva‐ lently, the rank of a revision r is the size of the set ancestors(r), r included. activebookmark String. The active bookmark, if it is associated with the changeset. author Alias for {user} bisect String. The changeset bisection status. bookmarks List of strings. Any bookmarks associated with the changeset. Also sets 'active', the name of the active bookmark. branch String. The name of the branch on which the changeset was committed. changessincelatesttag Integer. All ancestors not in the latest tag. children List of strings. The children of the changeset. date Date information. The date when the changeset was committed. desc String. The text of the changeset description. diffstat String. Statistics of changes with the following format: "modified files: +added/-re‐ moved lines" extras List of dicts with key, value entries of the 'extras' field of this changeset. file_adds List of strings. Files added by this changeset. file_copies List of strings. Files copied in this changeset with their sources. file_copies_switch List of strings. Like "file_copies" but displayed only if the --copied switch is set. file_dels List of strings. Files removed by this changeset. file_mods List of strings. Files modified by this changeset. files List of strings. All files modified, added, or removed by this changeset. graphnode String. The character representing the changeset node in an ASCII revision graph. graphwidth Integer. The width of the graph drawn by 'log --graph' or zero. index Integer. The current iteration of the loop. (0 indexed) latesttag List of strings. The global tags on the most recent globally tagged ancestor of this changeset. If no such tags exist, the list consists of the single string "null". latesttagdistance Integer. Longest path to the latest tag. namespaces Dict of lists. Names attached to this changeset per namespace. negrev Integer. The repository-local changeset negative revision number, which counts in the opposite direction. node String. The changeset identification hash, as a 40 hexadecimal digit string. onelinesummary String. A one-line summary for the ctx (not including trailing newline). The default template be overridden in command-templates.oneline-summary. p1 Changeset. The changeset's first parent. {p1.rev} for the revision number, and {p1.node} for the identification hash. p2 Changeset. The changeset's second parent. {p2.rev} for the revision number, and {p2.node} for the identification hash. parents List of strings. The parents of the changeset in "rev:node" format. If the changeset has only one "natural" parent (the predecessor revision) nothing is shown. peerurls A dictionary of repository locations defined in the [paths] section of your configura‐ tion file. phase String. The changeset phase name. reporoot String. The root directory of the current repository. rev Integer. The repository-local changeset revision number. subrepos List of strings. Updated subrepositories in the changeset. tags List of strings. Any tags associated with the changeset. termwidth Integer. The width of the current terminal. user String. The unmodified author of the changeset. verbosity String. The current output verbosity in 'debug', 'quiet', 'verbose', or ''. The "date" keyword does not produce human-readable output. If you want to use a date in your output, you can use a filter to process it. Filters are functions which return a string based on the input variable. Be sure to use the stringify filter first when you're applying a string-input filter to a list-like input variable. You can also use a chain of filters to get the desired output: $ hg tip --template "{date|isodate}\n" 2008-08-21 18:22 +0000 Filters List of filters: addbreaks Any text. Add an XHTML "<br />" tag before the end of every line except the last. age Date. Returns a human-readable date/time difference between the given date/time and the current date/time. basename Any text. Treats the text as a path, and returns the last component of the path after splitting by the path separator. For example, "foo/bar/baz" becomes "baz" and "foo/bar//" becomes "". cbor Any object. Serializes the object to CBOR bytes. commondir List of text. Treats each list item as file name with / as path separator and returns the longest common directory prefix shared by all list items. Returns the empty string if no common prefix exists. The list items are not normalized, i.e. "foo/../bar" is handled as file "bar" in the directory "foo/..". Leading slashes are ignored. For example, ["foo/bar/baz", "foo/baz/bar"] becomes "foo" and ["foo/bar", "baz"] be‐ comes "". count List or text. Returns the length as an integer. dirname Any text. Treats the text as a path, and strips the last component of the path after splitting by the path separator. domain Any text. Finds the first string that looks like an email address, and extracts just the domain component. Example: User <user AT example.com> becomes example.com. email Any text. Extracts the first string that looks like an email address. Example: User <user AT example.com> becomes user AT example.com. emailuser Any text. Returns the user portion of an email address. escape Any text. Replaces the special XML/XHTML characters "&", "<" and ">" with XML enti‐ ties, and filters out NUL characters. fill68 Any text. Wraps the text to fit in 68 columns. fill76 Any text. Wraps the text to fit in 76 columns. firstline Any text. Returns the first line of text. hex Any text. Convert a binary Mercurial node identifier into its long hexadecimal repre‐ sentation. hgdate Date. Returns the date as a pair of numbers: "1157407993 25200" (Unix timestamp, time‐ zone offset). isodate Date. Returns the date in ISO 8601 format: "2009-08-18 13:00 +0200". isodatesec Date. Returns the date in ISO 8601 format, including seconds: "2009-08-18 13:00:13 +0200". See also the rfc3339date filter. json Any object. Serializes the object to a JSON formatted text. lower Any text. Converts the text to lowercase. nonempty Any text. Returns '(none)' if the string is empty. obfuscate Any text. Returns the input text rendered as a sequence of XML entities. person Any text. Returns the name before an email address, interpreting it as per RFC 5322. revescape Any text. Escapes all "special" characters, except @. Forward slashes are escaped twice to prevent web servers from prematurely unescaping them. For example, "@foo bar/baz" becomes "@foo%20bar%252Fbaz". rfc3339date Date. Returns a date using the Internet date format specified in RFC 3339: "2009-08-18T13:00:13+02:00". rfc822date Date. Returns a date using the same format used in email headers: "Tue, 18 Aug 2009 13:00:13 +0200". short Changeset hash. Returns the short form of a changeset hash, i.e. a 12 hexadecimal digit string. shortbisect Any text. Treats label as a bisection status, and returns a single-character repre‐ senting the status (G: good, B: bad, S: skipped, U: untested, I: ignored). Returns single space if text is not a valid bisection status. shortdate Date. Returns a date like "2006-09-18". slashpath Any text. Replaces the native path separator with slash. splitlines Any text. Split text into a list of lines. stringify Any type. Turns the value into text by converting values into text and concatenating them. stripdir Treat the text as path and strip a directory level, if possible. For example, "foo" and "foo/bar" becomes "foo". tabindent Any text. Returns the text, with every non-empty line except the first starting with a tab character. upper Any text. Converts the text to uppercase. urlescape Any text. Escapes all "special" characters. For example, "foo bar" becomes "foo%20bar". user Any text. Returns a short representation of a user name or email address. utf8 Any text. Converts from the local character encoding to UTF-8. Note that a filter is nothing more than a function call, i.e. expr|filter is equivalent to filter(expr). Functions In addition to filters, there are some basic built-in functions: config(section, name[, default]) Returns the requested hgrc config option as a string. configbool(section, name[, default]) Returns the requested hgrc config option as a boolean. configint(section, name[, default]) Returns the requested hgrc config option as an integer. date(date[, fmt]) Format a date. See hg help dates for formatting strings. The default is a Unix date format, including the timezone: "Mon Sep 04 15:13:13 2006 0700". dict([[key=]value...]) Construct a dict from key-value pairs. A key may be omitted if a value expression can provide an unambiguous name. diff([includepattern [, excludepattern]]) Show a diff, optionally specifying files to include or exclude. files(pattern) All files of the current changeset matching the pattern. See hg help patterns. fill(text[, width[, initialident[, hangindent]]]) Fill many paragraphs with optional indentation. See the "fill" filter. filter(iterable[, expr]) Remove empty elements from a list or a dict. If expr specified, it's applied to each element to test emptiness. get(dict, key) Get an attribute/key from an object. Some keywords are complex types. This function allows you to obtain the value of an attribute on these types. if(expr, then[, else]) Conditionally execute based on the result of an expression. ifcontains(needle, haystack, then[, else]) Conditionally execute based on whether the item "needle" is in "haystack". ifeq(expr1, expr2, then[, else]) Conditionally execute based on whether 2 items are equivalent. indent(text, indentchars[, firstline]) Indents all non-empty lines with the characters given in the indentchars string. An optional third parameter will override the indent for the first line only if present. join(list, sep) Join items in a list with a delimiter. label(label, expr) Apply a label to generated content. Content with a label applied can result in addi‐ tional post-processing, such as automatic colorization. latesttag([pattern]) The global tags matching the given pattern on the most recent globally tagged ancestor of this changeset. If no such tags exist, the "{tag}" template resolves to the string "null". See hg help revisions.patterns for the pattern syntax. localdate(date[, tz]) Converts a date to the specified timezone. The default is local date. mailmap(author) Return the author, updated according to the value set in the .mailmap file max(iterable) Return the max of an iterable min(iterable) Return the min of an iterable mod(a, b) Calculate a mod b such that a / b + a mod b == a pad(text, width[, fillchar=' '[, left=False[, truncate=False]]]) Pad text with a fill character. relpath(path) Convert a repository-absolute path into a filesystem path relative to the current working directory. revset(query[, formatargs...]) Execute a revision set query. See hg help revset. rstdoc(text, style) Format reStructuredText. search(pattern, text) Look for the first text matching the regular expression pattern. Groups are accessi‐ ble as {1}, {2}, ... in %-mapped template. separate(sep, args...) Add a separator between non-empty arguments. shortest(node, minlength=4) Obtain the shortest representation of a node. startswith(pattern, text) Returns the value from the "text" argument if it begins with the content from the "pattern" argument. strip(text[, chars]) Strip characters from a string. By default, strips all leading and trailing white‐ space. sub(pattern, replacement, expression) Perform text substitution using regular expressions. subsetparents(rev, revset) Look up parents of the rev in the sub graph given by the revset. word(number, text[, separator]) Return the nth word from a string. Operators We provide a limited set of infix arithmetic operations on integers: + for addition - for subtraction * for multiplication / for floor division (division rounded to integer nearest -infinity) Division fulfills the law x = x / y + mod(x, y). Also, for any expression that returns a list, there is a list operator: expr % "{template}" As seen in the above example, {template} is interpreted as a template. To prevent it from being interpreted, you can use an escape character \{ or a raw string prefix, r'...'. The dot operator can be used as a shorthand for accessing a sub item: • expr.member is roughly equivalent to expr % '{member}' if expr returns a non-list/dict. The returned value is not stringified. • dict.key is identical to get(dict, 'key'). Aliases New keywords and functions can be defined in the templatealias section of a Mercurial config‐ uration file: <alias> = <definition> Arguments of the form a1, a2, etc. are substituted from the alias into the definition. For example, [templatealias] r = rev rn = "{r}:{node|short}" leftpad(s, w) = pad(s, w, ' ', True) defines two symbol aliases, r and rn, and a function alias leftpad(). It's also possible to specify complete template strings, using the templates section. The syntax used is the general template string syntax. For example, [templates] nodedate = "{node|short}: {date(date, "%Y-%m-%d")}\n" defines a template, nodedate, which can be called like: $ hg log -r . -Tnodedate A template defined in templates section can also be referenced from another template: $ hg log -r . -T "{rev} {nodedate}" but be aware that the keywords cannot be overridden by templates. For example, a template de‐ fined as templates.rev cannot be referenced as {rev}. A template defined in templates section may have sub templates which are inserted before/af‐ ter/between items: [templates] myjson = ' {dict(rev, node|short)|json}' myjson:docheader = '\{\n' myjson:docfooter = '\n}\n' myjson:separator = ',\n' Examples Some sample command line templates: • Format lists, e.g. files: $ hg log -r 0 --template "files:\n{files % ' {file}\n'}" • Join the list of files with a ", ": $ hg log -r 0 --template "files: {join(files, ', ')}\n" • Join the list of files ending with ".py" with a ", ": $ hg log -r 0 --template "pythonfiles: {join(files('**.py'), ', ')}\n" • Separate non-empty arguments by a " ": $ hg log -r 0 --template "{separate(' ', node, bookmarks, tags}\n" • Modify each line of a commit description: $ hg log --template "{splitlines(desc) % '**** {line}\n'}" • Format date: $ hg log -r 0 --template "{date(date, '%Y')}\n" • Display date in UTC: $ hg log -r 0 --template "{localdate(date, 'UTC')|date}\n" • Output the description set to a fill-width of 30: $ hg log -r 0 --template "{fill(desc, 30)}" • Use a conditional to test for the default branch: $ hg log -r 0 --template "{ifeq(branch, 'default', 'on the main branch', 'on branch {branch}')}\n" • Append a newline if not empty: $ hg tip --template "{if(author, '{author}\n')}" • Label the output for use with the color extension: $ hg log -r 0 --template "{label('changeset.{phase}', node|short)}\n" • Invert the firstline filter, i.e. everything but the first line: $ hg log -r 0 --template "{sub(r'^.*\n?\n?', '', desc)}\n" • Display the contents of the 'extra' field, one per line: $ hg log -r 0 --template "{join(extras, '\n')}\n" • Mark the active bookmark with '*': $ hg log --template "{bookmarks % '{bookmark}{ifeq(bookmark, active, '*')} '}\n" • Find the previous release candidate tag, the distance and changes since the tag: $ hg log -r . --template "{latesttag('re:^.*-rc$') % '{tag}, {changes}, {distance}'}\n" • Mark the working copy parent with '@': $ hg log --template "{ifcontains(rev, revset('.'), '@')}\n" • Show details of parent revisions: $ hg log --template "{revset('parents(%d)', rev) % '{desc|firstline}\n'}" • Show only commit descriptions that start with "template": $ hg log --template "{startswith('template', firstline(desc))}\n" • Print the first word of each line of a commit message: $ hg log --template "{word(0, desc)}\n" URL PATHS Valid URLs are of the form: local/filesystem/path[#revision] file://local/filesystem/path[#revision] http://[user[:pass]@]host[:port]/[path][#revision] https://[user[:pass]@]host[:port]/[path][#revision] ssh://[user@]host[:port]/[path][#revision] path://pathname Paths in the local filesystem can either point to Mercurial repositories or to bundle files (as created by hg bundle or hg incoming --bundle). See also hg help paths. An optional identifier after # indicates a particular branch, tag, or changeset to use from the remote repository. See also hg help revisions. Some features, such as pushing to http:// and https:// URLs are only possible if the feature is explicitly enabled on the remote Mercurial server. Note that the security of HTTPS URLs depends on proper configuration of web.cacerts. Some notes about using SSH with Mercurial: • SSH requires an accessible shell account on the destination machine and a copy of hg in the remote path or specified with remotecmd. • path is relative to the remote user's home directory by default. Use an extra slash at the start of a path to specify an absolute path: ssh://example.com//tmp/repository • Mercurial doesn't use its own compression via SSH; the right thing to do is to configure it in your ~/.ssh/config, e.g.: Host *.mylocalnetwork.example.com Compression no Host * Compression yes Alternatively specify "ssh -C" as your ssh command in your configuration file or with the --ssh command line option. These URLs can all be stored in your configuration file with path aliases under the [paths] section like so: [paths] alias1 = URL1 alias2 = URL2 ... You can then use the alias for any command that uses a URL (for example hg pull alias1 will be treated as hg pull URL1). Two path aliases are special because they are used as defaults when you do not provide the URL to a command: default: When you create a repository with hg clone, the clone command saves the location of the source repository as the new repository's 'default' path. This is then used when you omit path from push- and pull-like commands (including incoming and outgoing). default-push: The push command will look for a path named 'default-push', and prefer it over 'de‐ fault' if both are defined. These alias can also be use in the path:// scheme: [paths] alias1 = URL1 alias2 = path://alias1 ... check hg help config.paths for details about the behavior of such "sub-path". EXTENSIONS This section contains help for extensions that are distributed together with Mercurial. Help for other extensions is available in the help system. absorb apply working directory changes to changesets (EXPERIMENTAL) The absorb extension provides a command to use annotate information to amend modified chunks into the corresponding non-public changesets. [absorb] # only check 50 recent non-public changesets at most max-stack-size = 50 # whether to add noise to new commits to avoid obsolescence cycle add-noise = 1 # make `amend --correlated` a shortcut to the main command amend-flag = correlated [color] absorb.description = yellow absorb.node = blue bold absorb.path = bold Commands Change creation absorb incorporate corrections into the stack of draft changesets: hg absorb [OPTION] [FILE]... absorb analyzes each change in your working directory and attempts to amend the changed lines into the changesets in your stack that first introduced those lines. If absorb cannot find an unambiguous changeset to amend for a change, that change will be left in the working directory, untouched. They can be observed by hg status or hg diff after‐ wards. In other words, absorb does not write to the working directory. Changesets outside the revset ::. and not public() and not merge() will not be changed. Changesets that become empty after applying the changes will be deleted. By default, absorb will show what it plans to do and prompt for confirmation. If you are confident that the changes will be absorbed to the correct place, run hg absorb -a to apply the changes immediately. Returns 0 on success, 1 if all chunks were ignored and nothing amended. Options: -a, --apply-changes apply changes without prompting for confirmation -p, --print-changes always print which changesets are modified by which changes -i, --interactive interactively select which chunks to apply -e, --edit-lines edit what lines belong to which changesets before commit (EXPERIMENTAL) -n, --dry-run do not perform actions, just print output --style <STYLE> display using template map file (DEPRECATED) -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times acl hooks for controlling repository access This hook makes it possible to allow or deny write access to given branches and paths of a repository when receiving incoming changesets via pretxnchangegroup and pretxncommit. The authorization is matched based on the local user name on the system where the hook runs, and not the committer of the original changeset (since the latter is merely informative). The acl hook is best used along with a restricted shell like hgsh, preventing authenticating users from doing anything other than pushing or pulling. The hook is not safe to use if users have interactive shell access, as they can then disable the hook. Nor is it safe if remote users share an account, because then there is no way to distinguish them. The order in which access checks are performed is: 1. Deny list for branches (section acl.deny.branches) 2. Allow list for branches (section acl.allow.branches) 3. Deny list for paths (section acl.deny) 4. Allow list for paths (section acl.allow) The allow and deny sections take key-value pairs. Branch-based Access Control Use the acl.deny.branches and acl.allow.branches sections to have branch-based access con‐ trol. Keys in these sections can be either: • a branch name, or • an asterisk, to match any branch; The corresponding values can be either: • a comma-separated list containing users and groups, or • an asterisk, to match anyone; You can add the "!" prefix to a user or group name to invert the sense of the match. Path-based Access Control Use the acl.deny and acl.allow sections to have path-based access control. Keys in these sec‐ tions accept a subtree pattern (with a glob syntax by default). The corresponding values fol‐ low the same syntax as the other sections above. Bookmark-based Access Control Use the acl.deny.bookmarks and acl.allow.bookmarks sections to have bookmark-based access control. Keys in these sections can be either: • a bookmark name, or • an asterisk, to match any bookmark; The corresponding values can be either: • a comma-separated list containing users and groups, or • an asterisk, to match anyone; You can add the "!" prefix to a user or group name to invert the sense of the match. Note: for interactions between clients and servers using Mercurial 3.6+ a rejection will gen‐ erally reject the entire push, for interactions involving older clients, the commit transac‐ tions will already be accepted, and only the bookmark movement will be rejected. Groups Group names must be prefixed with an @ symbol. Specifying a group name has the same effect as specifying all the users in that group. You can define group members in the acl.groups section. If a group name is not defined there, and Mercurial is running under a Unix-like system, the list of users will be taken from the OS. Otherwise, an exception will be raised. Example Configuration [hooks] # Use this if you want to check access restrictions at commit time pretxncommit.acl = python:hgext.acl.hook # Use this if you want to check access restrictions for pull, push, # bundle and serve. pretxnchangegroup.acl = python:hgext.acl.hook [acl] # Allow or deny access for incoming changes only if their source is # listed here, let them pass otherwise. Source is "serve" for all # remote access (http or ssh), "push", "pull" or "bundle" when the # related commands are run locally. # Default: serve sources = serve [acl.deny.branches] # Everyone is denied to the frozen branch: frozen-branch = * # A bad user is denied on all branches: * = bad-user [acl.allow.branches] # A few users are allowed on branch-a: branch-a = user-1, user-2, user-3 # Only one user is allowed on branch-b: branch-b = user-1 # The super user is allowed on any branch: * = super-user # Everyone is allowed on branch-for-tests: branch-for-tests = * [acl.deny] # This list is checked first. If a match is found, acl.allow is not # checked. All users are granted access if acl.deny is not present. # Format for both lists: glob pattern = user, ..., @group, ... # To match everyone, use an asterisk for the user: # my/glob/pattern = * # user6 will not have write access to any file: ** = user6 # Group "hg-denied" will not have write access to any file: ** = @hg-denied # Nobody will be able to change "DONT-TOUCH-THIS.txt", despite # everyone being able to change all other files. See below. src/main/resources/DONT-TOUCH-THIS.txt = * [acl.allow] # if acl.allow is not present, all users are allowed by default # empty acl.allow = no users allowed # User "doc_writer" has write access to any file under the "docs" # folder: docs/** = doc_writer # User "jack" and group "designers" have write access to any file # under the "images" folder: images/** = jack, @designers # Everyone (except for "user6" and "@hg-denied" - see acl.deny above) # will have write access to any file under the "resources" folder # (except for 1 file. See acl.deny): src/main/resources/** = * .hgtags = release_engineer Examples using the ! prefix Suppose there's a branch that only a given user (or group) should be able to push to, and you don't want to restrict access to any other branch that may be created. The "!" prefix allows you to prevent anyone except a given user or group to push changesets in a given branch or path. In the examples below, we will: 1) Deny access to branch "ring" to anyone but user "gollum" 2) Deny access to branch "lake" to anyone but members of the group "hobbit" 3) Deny access to a file to anyone but user "gollum" [acl.allow.branches] # Empty [acl.deny.branches] # 1) only 'gollum' can commit to branch 'ring'; # 'gollum' and anyone else can still commit to any other branch. ring = !gollum # 2) only members of the group 'hobbit' can commit to branch 'lake'; # 'hobbit' members and anyone else can still commit to any other branch. lake = !@hobbit # You can also deny access based on file paths: [acl.allow] # Empty [acl.deny] # 3) only 'gollum' can change the file below; # 'gollum' and anyone else can still change any other file. /misty/mountains/cave/ring = !gollum amend provide the amend command (EXPERIMENTAL) This extension provides an amend command that is similar to commit --amend but does not prompt an editor. Commands Change creation amend amend the working copy parent with all or specified outstanding changes: hg amend [OPTION]... [FILE]... Similar to hg commit --amend, but reuse the commit message without invoking editor, unless --edit was set. See hg help commit for more details. Options: -A, --addremove mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages -i, --interactive use interactive mode --close-branch mark a branch as closed, hiding it from the branch list -s, --secret use the secret phase for committing -n,--note <VALUE> store a note on the amend -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -l,--logfile <FILE> read commit message from file -d,--date <DATE> record the specified date as commit date -u,--user <USER> record the specified user as committer -D, --currentdate record the current date as commit date -U, --currentuser record the current user as committer [+] marked option can be specified multiple times automv check for unrecorded moves at commit time (EXPERIMENTAL) This extension checks at commit/amend time if any of the committed files comes from an un‐ recorded mv. The threshold at which a file is considered a move can be set with the automv.similarity con‐ fig option. This option takes a percentage between 0 (disabled) and 100 (files must be iden‐ tical), the default is 95. beautifygraph beautify log -G output by using Unicode characters (EXPERIMENTAL) A terminal with UTF-8 support and monospace narrow text are required. blackbox log repository events to a blackbox for debugging Logs event information to .hg/blackbox.log to help debug and diagnose problems. The events that get logged can be configured via the blackbox.track and blackbox.ignore config keys. Examples: [blackbox] track = * ignore = pythonhook # dirty is *EXPENSIVE* (slow); # each log entry indicates `+` if the repository is dirty, like :hg:`id`. dirty = True # record the source of log messages logsource = True [blackbox] track = command, commandfinish, commandexception, exthook, pythonhook [blackbox] track = incoming [blackbox] # limit the size of a log file maxsize = 1.5 MB # rotate up to N log files when the current one gets too big maxfiles = 3 [blackbox] # Include microseconds in log entries with %f (see Python function # datetime.datetime.strftime) date-format = %Y-%m-%d @ %H:%M:%S.%f Commands Repository maintenance blackbox view the recent repository events: hg blackbox [OPTION]... view the recent repository events Options: -l,--limit <VALUE> the number of events to show (default: 10) bookflow implements bookmark-based branching (EXPERIMENTAL) • Disables creation of new branches (config: enable_branches=False). • Requires an active bookmark on commit (config: require_bookmark=True). • Doesn't move the active bookmark on update, only on commit. • Requires '--rev' for moving an existing bookmark. • Protects special bookmarks (config: protect=@). flow related commands hg book NAME create a new bookmark hg book NAME -r REV move bookmark to revision (fast-forward) hg up|co NAME switch to bookmark hg push -B . push active bookmark bugzilla hooks for integrating with the Bugzilla bug tracker This hook extension adds comments on bugs in Bugzilla when changesets that refer to bugs by Bugzilla ID are seen. The comment is formatted using the Mercurial template mechanism. The bug references can optionally include an update for Bugzilla of the hours spent working on the bug. Bugs can also be marked fixed. Four basic modes of access to Bugzilla are provided: 1. Access via the Bugzilla REST-API. Requires bugzilla 5.0 or later. 2. Access via the Bugzilla XMLRPC interface. Requires Bugzilla 3.4 or later. 3. Check data via the Bugzilla XMLRPC interface and submit bug change via email to Bugzilla email interface. Requires Bugzilla 3.4 or later. 4. Writing directly to the Bugzilla database. Only Bugzilla installations using MySQL are supported. Requires Python MySQLdb. Writing directly to the database is susceptible to schema changes, and relies on a Bugzilla contrib script to send out bug change notification emails. This script runs as the user run‐ ning Mercurial, must be run on the host with the Bugzilla install, and requires permission to read Bugzilla configuration details and the necessary MySQL user and password to have full access rights to the Bugzilla database. For these reasons this access mode is now considered deprecated, and will not be updated for new Bugzilla versions going forward. Only adding com‐ ments is supported in this access mode. Access via XMLRPC needs a Bugzilla username and password to be specified in the configura‐ tion. Comments are added under that username. Since the configuration must be readable by all Mercurial users, it is recommended that the rights of that user are restricted in Bugzilla to the minimum necessary to add comments. Marking bugs fixed requires Bugzilla 4.0 and later. Access via XMLRPC/email uses XMLRPC to query Bugzilla, but sends email to the Bugzilla email interface to submit comments to bugs. The From: address in the email is set to the email ad‐ dress of the Mercurial user, so the comment appears to come from the Mercurial user. In the event that the Mercurial user email is not recognized by Bugzilla as a Bugzilla user, the email associated with the Bugzilla username used to log into Bugzilla is used instead as the source of the comment. Marking bugs fixed works on all supported Bugzilla versions. Access via the REST-API needs either a Bugzilla username and password or an apikey specified in the configuration. Comments are made under the given username or the user associated with the apikey in Bugzilla. Configuration items common to all access modes: bugzilla.version The access type to use. Values recognized are: restapi Bugzilla REST-API, Bugzilla 5.0 and later. xmlrpc Bugzilla XMLRPC interface. xmlrpc+email Bugzilla XMLRPC and email interfaces. 3.0 MySQL access, Bugzilla 3.0 and later. 2.18 MySQL access, Bugzilla 2.18 and up to but not including 3.0. 2.16 MySQL access, Bugzilla 2.16 and up to but not including 2.18. bugzilla.regexp Regular expression to match bug IDs for update in changeset commit message. It must contain one "()" named group <ids> containing the bug IDs separated by non-digit char‐ acters. It may also contain a named group <hours> with a floating-point number giving the hours worked on the bug. If no named groups are present, the first "()" group is assumed to contain the bug IDs, and work time is not updated. The default expression matches Bug 1234, Bug no. 1234, Bug number 1234, Bugs 1234,5678, Bug 1234 and 5678 and variations thereof, followed by an hours number prefixed by h or hours, e.g. hours 1.5. Matching is case insensitive. bugzilla.fixregexp Regular expression to match bug IDs for marking fixed in changeset commit message. This must contain a "()" named group <ids>` containing the bug IDs separated by non-digit characters. It may also contain a named group ``<hours> with a float‐ ing-point number giving the hours worked on the bug. If no named groups are present, the first "()" group is assumed to contain the bug IDs, and work time is not updated. The default expression matches Fixes 1234, Fixes bug 1234, Fixes bugs 1234,5678, Fixes 1234 and 5678 and variations thereof, followed by an hours number prefixed by h or hours, e.g. hours 1.5. Matching is case insensitive. bugzilla.fixstatus The status to set a bug to when marking fixed. Default RESOLVED. bugzilla.fixresolution The resolution to set a bug to when marking fixed. Default FIXED. bugzilla.style The style file to use when formatting comments. bugzilla.template Template to use when formatting comments. Overrides style if specified. In addition to the usual Mercurial keywords, the extension specifies: {bug} The Bugzilla bug ID. {root} The full pathname of the Mercurial repository. {webroot} Stripped pathname of the Mercurial repository. {hgweb} Base URL for browsing Mercurial repositories. Default changeset {node|short} in repo {root} refers to bug {bug}.\nde‐‐ tails:\n\t{desc|tabindent} bugzilla.strip The number of path separator characters to strip from the front of the Mercurial repository path ({root} in templates) to produce {webroot}. For example, a repository with {root} /var/local/my-project with a strip of 2 gives a value for {webroot} of my-project. Default 0. web.baseurl Base URL for browsing Mercurial repositories. Referenced from templates as {hgweb}. Configuration items common to XMLRPC+email and MySQL access modes: bugzilla.usermap Path of file containing Mercurial committer email to Bugzilla user email mappings. If specified, the file should contain one mapping per line: committer = Bugzilla user See also the [usermap] section. The [usermap] section is used to specify mappings of Mercurial committer email to Bugzilla user email. See also bugzilla.usermap. Contains entries of the form committer = Bugzilla user. XMLRPC and REST-API access mode configuration: bugzilla.bzurl The base URL for the Bugzilla installation. Default http://localhost/bugzilla. bugzilla.user The username to use to log into Bugzilla via XMLRPC. Default bugs. bugzilla.password The password for Bugzilla login. REST-API access mode uses the options listed above as well as: bugzilla.apikey An apikey generated on the Bugzilla instance for api access. Using an apikey removes the need to store the user and password options. XMLRPC+email access mode uses the XMLRPC access mode configuration items, and also: bugzilla.bzemail The Bugzilla email address. In addition, the Mercurial email settings must be configured. See the documentation in hgrc(5), sections [email] and [smtp]. MySQL access mode configuration: bugzilla.host Hostname of the MySQL server holding the Bugzilla database. Default localhost. bugzilla.db Name of the Bugzilla database in MySQL. Default bugs. bugzilla.user Username to use to access MySQL server. Default bugs. bugzilla.password Password to use to access MySQL server. bugzilla.timeout Database connection timeout (seconds). Default 5. bugzilla.bzuser Fallback Bugzilla user name to record comments with, if changeset committer cannot be found as a Bugzilla user. bugzilla.bzdir Bugzilla install directory. Used by default notify. Default /var/www/html/bugzilla. bugzilla.notify The command to run to get Bugzilla to send bug change notification emails. Substitutes from a map with 3 keys, bzdir, id (bug id) and user (committer bugzilla email). De‐ fault depends on version; from 2.18 it is "cd %(bzdir)s && perl -T contrib/sendbug‐ mail.pl %(id)s %(user)s". Activating the extension: [extensions] bugzilla = [hooks] # run bugzilla hook on every change pulled or pushed in here incoming.bugzilla = python:hgext.bugzilla.hook Example configurations: XMLRPC example configuration. This uses the Bugzilla at http://my-project.org/bugzilla, log‐ ging in as user bugmail AT my-project.org with password plugh. It is used with a collection of Mercurial repositories in /var/local/hg/repos/, with a web interface at http://my-project.org/hg. [bugzilla] bzurl=http://my-project.org/bugzilla user=bugmail AT my-project.org password=plugh version=xmlrpc template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}. {hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n {desc}\n strip=5 [web] baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg XMLRPC+email example configuration. This uses the Bugzilla at http://my-project.org/bugzilla, logging in as user bugmail AT my-project.org with password plugh. It is used with a collection of Mercurial repositories in /var/local/hg/repos/, with a web interface at http://my-project.org/hg. Bug comments are sent to the Bugzilla email address bugzilla AT my-project.org. [bugzilla] bzurl=http://my-project.org/bugzilla user=bugmail AT my-project.org password=plugh version=xmlrpc+email bzemail=bugzilla AT my-project.org template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}. {hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n {desc}\n strip=5 [web] baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg [usermap] user AT emaildomain.com=user.name AT bugzilladomain.com MySQL example configuration. This has a local Bugzilla 3.2 installation in /opt/bugzilla-3.2. The MySQL database is on localhost, the Bugzilla database name is bugs and MySQL is accessed with MySQL username bugs password XYZZY. It is used with a collection of Mercurial reposito‐ ries in /var/local/hg/repos/, with a web interface at http://my-project.org/hg. [bugzilla] host=localhost password=XYZZY version=3.0 bzuser=unknown AT domain.com bzdir=/opt/bugzilla-3.2 template=Changeset {node|short} in {root|basename}. {hgweb}/{webroot}/rev/{node|short}\n {desc}\n strip=5 [web] baseurl=http://my-project.org/hg [usermap] user AT emaildomain.com=user.name AT bugzilladomain.com All the above add a comment to the Bugzilla bug record of the form: Changeset 3b16791d6642 in repository-name. http://my-project.org/hg/repository-name/rev/3b16791d6642 Changeset commit comment. Bug 1234. censor erase file content at a given revision The censor command instructs Mercurial to erase all content of a file at a given revision without updating the changeset hash. This allows existing history to remain valid while pre‐ venting future clones/pulls from receiving the erased data. Typical uses for censor are due to security or legal requirements, including: * Passwords, private keys, cryptographic material * Licensed data/code/libraries for which the license has expired * Personally Identifiable Information or other private data Censored nodes can interrupt mercurial's typical operation whenever the excised data needs to be materialized. Some commands, like hg cat/hg revert, simply fail when asked to produce cen‐ sored data. Others, like hg verify and hg update, must be capable of tolerating censored data to continue to function in a meaningful way. Such commands only tolerate censored file revi‐ sions if they are allowed by the "censor.policy=ignore" config option. A few informative commands such as hg grep will unconditionally ignore censored data and merely report that it was encountered. Commands Repository maintenance censor hg censor -r REV [-t TEXT] [FILE] Options: -r,--rev <REV> censor file from specified revision -t,--tombstone <TEXT> replacement tombstone data children command to display child changesets (DEPRECATED) This extension is deprecated. You should use hg log -r "children(REV)" instead. Commands Change navigation children show the children of the given or working directory revision: hg children [-r REV] [FILE] Print the children of the working directory's revisions. If a revision is given via -r/--rev, the children of that revision will be printed. If a file argument is given, revision in which the file was last changed (after the working directory revision or the argument to --rev if given) is printed. Please use hg log instead: hg children => hg log -r "children(.)" hg children -r REV => hg log -r "children(REV)" See hg help log and hg help revsets.children. Options: -r,--rev <REV> show children of the specified revision (default: .) --style <STYLE> display using template map file (DEPRECATED) -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template churn command to display statistics about repository history Commands Repository maintenance churn histogram of changes to the repository: hg churn [-d DATE] [-r REV] [--aliases FILE] [FILE] This command will display a histogram representing the number of changed lines or revisions, grouped according to the given template. The default template will group changes by author. The --dateformat option may be used to group the results by date instead. Statistics are based on the number of changed lines, or alternatively the number of matching revisions if the --changesets option is specified. Examples: # display count of changed lines for every committer hg churn -T "{author|email}" # display daily activity graph hg churn -f "%H" -s -c # display activity of developers by month hg churn -f "%Y-%m" -s -c # display count of lines changed in every year hg churn -f "%Y" -s # display count of lines changed in a time range hg churn -d "2020-04 to 2020-09" It is possible to map alternate email addresses to a main address by providing a file using the following format: <alias email> = <actual email> Such a file may be specified with the --aliases option, otherwise a .hgchurn file will be looked for in the working directory root. Aliases will be split from the rightmost "=". Options: -r,--rev <REV[+]> count rate for the specified revision or revset -d,--date <DATE> count rate for revisions matching date spec -t,--oldtemplate <TEMPLATE> template to group changesets (DEPRECATED) -T,--template <TEMPLATE> template to group changesets (default: {author|email}) -f,--dateformat <FORMAT> strftime-compatible format for grouping by date -c, --changesets count rate by number of changesets -s, --sort sort by key (default: sort by count) --diffstat display added/removed lines separately --aliases <FILE> file with email aliases -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times clonebundles advertise pre-generated bundles to seed clones "clonebundles" is a server-side extension used to advertise the existence of pre-generated, externally hosted bundle files to clients that are cloning so that cloning can be faster, more reliable, and require less resources on the server. "pullbundles" is a related feature for sending pre-generated bundle files to clients as part of pull operations. Cloning can be a CPU and I/O intensive operation on servers. Traditionally, the server, in response to a client's request to clone, dynamically generates a bundle containing the entire repository content and sends it to the client. There is no caching on the server and the server will have to redundantly generate the same outgoing bundle in response to each clone request. For servers with large repositories or with high clone volume, the load from clones can make scaling the server challenging and costly. This extension provides server operators the ability to offload potentially expensive clone load to an external service. Pre-generated bundles also allow using more CPU intensive com‐ pression, reducing the effective bandwidth requirements. Here's how clone bundles work: 1. A server operator establishes a mechanism for making bundle files available on a hosting service where Mercurial clients can fetch them. 2. A manifest file listing available bundle URLs and some optional metadata is added to the Mercurial repository on the server. 3. A client initiates a clone against a clone bundles aware server. 4. The client sees the server is advertising clone bundles and fetches the manifest listing available bundles. 5. The client filters and sorts the available bundles based on what it supports and prefers. 6. The client downloads and applies an available bundle from the server-specified URL. 7. The client reconnects to the original server and performs the equivalent of hg pull to re‐ trieve all repository data not in the bundle. (The repository could have been updated be‐ tween when the bundle was created and when the client started the clone.) This may use "pullbundles". Instead of the server generating full repository bundles for every clone request, it gener‐ ates full bundles once and they are subsequently reused to bootstrap new clones. The server may still transfer data at clone time. However, this is only data that has been added/changed since the bundle was created. For large, established repositories, this can re‐ duce server load for clones to less than 1% of original. Here's how pullbundles work: 1. A manifest file listing available bundles and describing the revisions is added to the Mercurial repository on the server. 2. A new-enough client informs the server that it supports partial pulls and initiates a pull. 3. If the server has pull bundles enabled and sees the client advertising partial pulls, it checks for a matching pull bundle in the manifest. A bundle matches if the format is sup‐ ported by the client, the client has the required revisions already and needs something from the bundle. 4. If there is at least one matching bundle, the server sends it to the client. 5. The client applies the bundle and notices that the server reply was incomplete. It initi‐ ates another pull. To work, this extension requires the following of server operators: • Generating bundle files of repository content (typically periodically, such as once per day). • Clone bundles: A file server that clients have network access to and that Python knows how to talk to through its normal URL handling facility (typically an HTTP/HTTPS server). • A process for keeping the bundles manifest in sync with available bundle files. Strictly speaking, using a static file hosting server isn't required: a server operator could use a dynamic service for retrieving bundle data. However, static file hosting services are simple and scalable and should be sufficient for most needs. Bundle files can be generated with the hg bundle command. Typically hg bundle --all is used to produce a bundle of the entire repository. hg debugcreatestreamclonebundle can be used to produce a special streaming clonebundle. These are bundle files that are extremely efficient to produce and consume (read: fast). However, they are larger than traditional bundle formats and require that clients support the exact set of repository data store formats in use by the repository that created them. Typically, a newer server can serve data that is compatible with older clients. However, streaming clone bundles don't have this guarantee. Server operators need to be aware that newer ver‐‐ sions of Mercurial may produce streaming clone bundles incompatible with older Mercurial ver‐‐ sions. A server operator is responsible for creating a .hg/clonebundles.manifest file containing the list of available bundle files suitable for seeding clones. If this file does not exist, the repository will not advertise the existence of clone bundles when clients connect. For pull bundles, .hg/pullbundles.manifest is used. The manifest file contains a newline (n) delimited list of entries. Each line in this file defines an available bundle. Lines have the format: <URL> [<key>=<value>[ <key>=<value>]] That is, a URL followed by an optional, space-delimited list of key=value pairs describing additional properties of this bundle. Both keys and values are URI encoded. For pull bundles, the URL is a path under the .hg directory of the repository. Keys in UPPERCASE are reserved for use by Mercurial and are defined below. All non-uppercase keys can be used by site installations. An example use for custom properties is to use the datacenter attribute to define which data center a file is hosted in. Clients could then pre‐ fer a server in the data center closest to them. The following reserved keys are currently defined: BUNDLESPEC A "bundle specification" string that describes the type of the bundle. These are string values that are accepted by the "--type" argument of hg bundle. The values are parsed in strict mode, which means they must be of the "<compres‐ sion>-<type>" form. See mercurial.exchange.parsebundlespec() for more details. hg debugbundle --spec can be used to print the bundle specification string for a bun‐ dle file. The output of this command can be used verbatim for the value of BUNDLESPEC (it is already escaped). Clients will automatically filter out specifications that are unknown or unsupported so they won't attempt to download something that likely won't apply. The actual value doesn't impact client behavior beyond filtering: clients will still sniff the bundle type from the header of downloaded files. Use of this key is highly recommended, as it allows clients to easily skip unsupported bundles. If this key is not defined, an old client may attempt to apply a bundle that it is incapable of reading. REQUIRESNI Whether Server Name Indication (SNI) is required to connect to the URL. SNI allows servers to use multiple certificates on the same IP. It is somewhat common in CDNs and other hosting providers. Older Python versions do not support SNI. Defining this at‐ tribute enables clients with older Python versions to filter this entry without expe‐ riencing an opaque SSL failure at connection time. If this is defined, it is important to advertise a non-SNI fallback URL or clients running old Python releases may not be able to clone with the clonebundles facility. Value should be "true". REQUIREDRAM Value specifies expected memory requirements to decode the payload. Values can have suffixes for common bytes sizes. e.g. "64MB". This key is often used with zstd-compressed bundles using a high compression level / window size, which can require 100+ MB of memory to decode. heads Used for pull bundles. This contains the ; separated changeset hashes of the heads of the bundle content. bases Used for pull bundles. This contains the ; separated changeset hashes of the roots of the bundle content. This can be skipped if the bundle was created without --base. Manifests can contain multiple entries. Assuming metadata is defined, clients will filter en‐ tries from the manifest that they don't support. The remaining entries are optionally sorted by client preferences (ui.clonebundleprefers config option). The client then attempts to fetch the bundle at the first URL in the remaining list. Errors when downloading a bundle will fail the entire clone operation: clients do not auto‐‐ matically fall back to a traditional clone. The reason for this is that if a server is using clone bundles, it is probably doing so because the feature is necessary to help it scale. In other words, there is an assumption that clone load will be offloaded to another service and that the Mercurial server isn't responsible for serving this clone load. If that other ser‐ vice experiences issues and clients start mass falling back to the original Mercurial server, the added clone load could overwhelm the server due to unexpected load and effectively take it offline. Not having clients automatically fall back to cloning from the original server mitigates this scenario. Because there is no automatic Mercurial server fallback on failure of the bundle hosting ser‐ vice, it is important for server operators to view the bundle hosting service as an extension of the Mercurial server in terms of availability and service level agreements: if the bundle hosting service goes down, so does the ability for clients to clone. Note: clients will see a message informing them how to bypass the clone bundles facility when a failure occurs. So server operators should prepare for some people to follow these instructions when a failure occurs, thus driving more load to the original Mercurial server when the bundle hosting ser‐ vice fails. closehead close arbitrary heads without checking them out first Commands Change manipulation close-head close the given head revisions: hg close-head [OPTION]... [REV]... This is equivalent to checking out each revision in a clean tree and running hg commit --close-branch, except that it doesn't change the working directory. The commit message must be specified with -l or -m. Options: -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -l,--logfile <FILE> read commit message from file -d,--date <DATE> record the specified date as commit date -u,--user <USER> record the specified user as committer -r,--rev <REV[+]> revision to check [+] marked option can be specified multiple times aliases: close-heads commitextras adds a new flag extras to commit (ADVANCED) convert import revisions from foreign VCS repositories into Mercurial Commands Uncategorized commands convert convert a foreign SCM repository to a Mercurial one.: hg convert [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST [REVMAP]] Accepted source formats [identifiers]: • Mercurial [hg] • CVS [cvs] • Darcs [darcs] • git [git] • Subversion [svn] • Monotone [mtn] • GNU Arch [gnuarch] • Bazaar [bzr] • Perforce [p4] Accepted destination formats [identifiers]: • Mercurial [hg] • Subversion [svn] (history on branches is not preserved) If no revision is given, all revisions will be converted. Otherwise, convert will only im‐ port up to the named revision (given in a format understood by the source). If no destination directory name is specified, it defaults to the basename of the source with -hg appended. If the destination repository doesn't exist, it will be created. By default, all sources except Mercurial will use --branchsort. Mercurial uses --sourcesort to preserve original revision numbers order. Sort modes have the following effects: --branchsort convert from parent to child revision when possible, which means branches are usually converted one after the other. It generates more compact repositories. --datesort sort revisions by date. Converted repositories have good-looking changelogs but are often an order of magnitude larger than the same ones generated by --branchsort. --sourcesort try to preserve source revisions order, only supported by Mercurial sources. --closesort try to move closed revisions as close as possible to parent branches, only supported by Mercurial sources. If REVMAP isn't given, it will be put in a default location (<dest>/.hg/shamap by default). The REVMAP is a simple text file that maps each source commit ID to the destination ID for that revision, like so: <source ID> <destination ID> If the file doesn't exist, it's automatically created. It's updated on each commit copied, so hg convert can be interrupted and can be run repeatedly to copy new commits. The authormap is a simple text file that maps each source commit author to a destination com‐ mit author. It is handy for source SCMs that use unix logins to identify authors (e.g.: CVS). One line per author mapping and the line format is: source author = destination author Empty lines and lines starting with a # are ignored. The filemap is a file that allows filtering and remapping of files and directories. Each line can contain one of the following directives: include path/to/file-or-dir exclude path/to/file-or-dir rename path/to/source path/to/destination Comment lines start with #. A specified path matches if it equals the full relative name of a file or one of its parent directories. The include or exclude directive with the longest matching path applies, so line order does not matter. The include directive causes a file, or all files under a directory, to be included in the destination repository. The default if there are no include statements is to include every‐ thing. If there are any include statements, nothing else is included. The exclude directive causes files or directories to be omitted. The rename directive renames a file or directory if it is converted. To rename from a subdirectory into the root of the repository, use . as the path to rename to. --full will make sure the converted changesets contain exactly the right files with the right content. It will make a full conversion of all files, not just the ones that have changed. Files that already are correct will not be changed. This can be used to apply filemap changes when converting incrementally. This is currently only supported for Mercurial and Subversion. The splicemap is a file that allows insertion of synthetic history, letting you specify the parents of a revision. This is useful if you want to e.g. give a Subversion merge two par‐ ents, or graft two disconnected series of history together. Each entry contains a key, fol‐ lowed by a space, followed by one or two comma-separated values: key parent1, parent2 The key is the revision ID in the source revision control system whose parents should be mod‐ ified (same format as a key in .hg/shamap). The values are the revision IDs (in either the source or destination revision control system) that should be used as the new parents for that node. For example, if you have merged "release-1.0" into "trunk", then you should spec‐ ify the revision on "trunk" as the first parent and the one on the "release-1.0" branch as the second. The branchmap is a file that allows you to rename a branch when it is being brought in from whatever external repository. When used in conjunction with a splicemap, it allows for a pow‐ erful combination to help fix even the most badly mismanaged repositories and turn them into nicely structured Mercurial repositories. The branchmap contains lines of the form: original_branch_name new_branch_name where "original_branch_name" is the name of the branch in the source repository, and "new_branch_name" is the name of the branch is the destination repository. No whitespace is allowed in the new branch name. This can be used to (for instance) move code in one reposi‐ tory from "default" to a named branch. Mercurial Source The Mercurial source recognizes the following configuration options, which you can set on the command line with --config: convert.hg.ignoreerrors ignore integrity errors when reading. Use it to fix Mercurial repositories with miss‐ ing revlogs, by converting from and to Mercurial. Default is False. convert.hg.saverev store original revision ID in changeset (forces target IDs to change). It takes a boolean argument and defaults to False. convert.hg.startrev specify the initial Mercurial revision. The default is 0. convert.hg.revs revset specifying the source revisions to convert. Bazaar Source The following options can be used with --config: convert.bzr.saverev whether to store the original Bazaar commit ID in the metadata of the destination com‐ mit. The default is True. CVS Source CVS source will use a sandbox (i.e. a checked-out copy) from CVS to indicate the starting point of what will be converted. Direct access to the repository files is not needed, unless of course the repository is :local:. The conversion uses the top level directory in the sand‐ box to find the CVS repository, and then uses CVS rlog commands to find files to convert. This means that unless a filemap is given, all files under the starting directory will be converted, and that any directory reorganization in the CVS sandbox is ignored. The following options can be used with --config: convert.cvsps.cache Set to False to disable remote log caching, for testing and debugging purposes. De‐ fault is True. convert.cvsps.fuzz Specify the maximum time (in seconds) that is allowed between commits with identical user and log message in a single changeset. When very large files were checked in as part of a changeset then the default may not be long enough. The default is 60. convert.cvsps.logencoding Specify encoding name to be used for transcoding CVS log messages. Multiple encoding names can be specified as a list (see hg help config.Syntax), but only the first ac‐ ceptable encoding in the list is used per CVS log entries. This transcoding is exe‐ cuted before cvslog hook below. convert.cvsps.mergeto Specify a regular expression to which commit log messages are matched. If a match oc‐ curs, then the conversion process will insert a dummy revision merging the branch on which this log message occurs to the branch indicated in the regex. Default is {{mergetobranch ([-\w]+)}} convert.cvsps.mergefrom Specify a regular expression to which commit log messages are matched. If a match oc‐ curs, then the conversion process will add the most recent revision on the branch in‐ dicated in the regex as the second parent of the changeset. Default is {{mergefrom‐‐ branch ([-\w]+)}} convert.localtimezone use local time (as determined by the TZ environment variable) for changeset date/times. The default is False (use UTC). hooks.cvslog Specify a Python function to be called at the end of gathering the CVS log. The func‐ tion is passed a list with the log entries, and can modify the entries in-place, or add or delete them. hooks.cvschangesets Specify a Python function to be called after the changesets are calculated from the CVS log. The function is passed a list with the changeset entries, and can modify the changesets in-place, or add or delete them. An additional "debugcvsps" Mercurial command allows the builtin changeset merging code to be run without doing a conversion. Its parameters and output are similar to that of cvsps 2.1. Please see the command help for more details. Subversion Source Subversion source detects classical trunk/branches/tags layouts. By default, the supplied svn://repo/path/ source URL is converted as a single branch. If svn://repo/path/trunk exists it replaces the default branch. If svn://repo/path/branches exists, its subdirectories are listed as possible branches. If svn://repo/path/tags exists, it is looked for tags referenc‐ ing converted branches. Default trunk, branches and tags values can be overridden with fol‐ lowing options. Set them to paths relative to the source URL, or leave them blank to disable auto detection. The following options can be set with --config: convert.svn.branches specify the directory containing branches. The default is branches. convert.svn.tags specify the directory containing tags. The default is tags. convert.svn.trunk specify the name of the trunk branch. The default is trunk. convert.localtimezone use local time (as determined by the TZ environment variable) for changeset date/times. The default is False (use UTC). Source history can be retrieved starting at a specific revision, instead of being integrally converted. Only single branch conversions are supported. convert.svn.startrev specify start Subversion revision number. The default is 0. Git Source The Git importer converts commits from all reachable branches (refs in refs/heads) and re‐ motes (refs in refs/remotes) to Mercurial. Branches are converted to bookmarks with the same name, with the leading 'refs/heads' stripped. Git submodules are converted to Git subrepos in Mercurial. The following options can be set with --config: convert.git.similarity specify how similar files modified in a commit must be to be imported as renames or copies, as a percentage between 0 (disabled) and 100 (files must be identical). For example, 90 means that a delete/add pair will be imported as a rename if more than 90% of the file hasn't changed. The default is 50. convert.git.findcopiesharder while detecting copies, look at all files in the working copy instead of just changed ones. This is very expensive for large projects, and is only effective when con‐‐ vert.git.similarity is greater than 0. The default is False. convert.git.renamelimit perform rename and copy detection up to this many changed files in a commit. Increas‐ ing this will make rename and copy detection more accurate but will significantly slow down computation on large projects. The option is only relevant if convert.git.simi‐‐ larity is greater than 0. The default is 400. convert.git.committeractions list of actions to take when processing author and committer values. Git commits have separate author (who wrote the commit) and committer (who applied the commit) fields. Not all destinations support separate author and committer fields (in‐ cluding Mercurial). This config option controls what to do with these author and com‐ mitter fields during conversion. A value of messagedifferent will append a committer: ... line to the commit message if the Git committer is different from the author. The prefix of that line can be specified using the syntax messagedifferent=<prefix>. e.g. messagedifferent=git-com‐‐ mitter:. When a prefix is specified, a space will always be inserted between the pre‐ fix and the value. messagealways behaves like messagedifferent except it will always result in a commit‐‐ ter: ... line being appended to the commit message. This value is mutually exclusive with messagedifferent. dropcommitter will remove references to the committer. Only references to the author will remain. Actions that add references to the committer will have no effect when this is set. replaceauthor will replace the value of the author field with the committer. Other ac‐ tions that add references to the committer will still take effect when this is set. The default is messagedifferent. convert.git.extrakeys list of extra keys from commit metadata to copy to the destination. Some Git reposito‐ ries store extra metadata in commits. By default, this non-default metadata will be lost during conversion. Setting this config option can retain that metadata. Some built-in keys such as parent and branch are not allowed to be copied. convert.git.remoteprefix remote refs are converted as bookmarks with convert.git.remoteprefix as a prefix fol‐ lowed by a /. The default is 'remote'. convert.git.saverev whether to store the original Git commit ID in the metadata of the destination commit. The default is True. convert.git.skipsubmodules does not convert root level .gitmodules files or files with 160000 mode indicating a submodule. Default is False. Perforce Source The Perforce (P4) importer can be given a p4 depot path or a client specification as source. It will convert all files in the source to a flat Mercurial repository, ignoring labels, branches and integrations. Note that when a depot path is given you then usually should spec‐ ify a target directory, because otherwise the target may be named ...-hg. The following options can be set with --config: convert.p4.encoding specify the encoding to use when decoding standard output of the Perforce command line tool. The default is default system encoding. convert.p4.startrev specify initial Perforce revision (a Perforce changelist number). Mercurial Destination The Mercurial destination will recognize Mercurial subrepositories in the destination direc‐ tory, and update the .hgsubstate file automatically if the destination subrepositories con‐ tain the <dest>/<sub>/.hg/shamap file. Converting a repository with subrepositories requires converting a single repository at a time, from the bottom up. An example showing how to convert a repository with subrepositories: # so convert knows the type when it sees a non empty destination $ hg init converted $ hg convert orig/sub1 converted/sub1 $ hg convert orig/sub2 converted/sub2 $ hg convert orig converted The following options are supported: convert.hg.clonebranches dispatch source branches in separate clones. The default is False. convert.hg.tagsbranch branch name for tag revisions, defaults to default. convert.hg.usebranchnames preserve branch names. The default is True. convert.hg.sourcename records the given string as a 'convert_source' extra value on each commit made in the target repository. The default is None. convert.hg.preserve-hash only works with mercurial sources. Make convert prevent performance improvement to the list of modified files in commits when such an improvement would cause the hash of a commit to change. The default is False. All Destinations All destination types accept the following options: convert.skiptags does not convert tags from the source repo to the target repo. The default is False. Subversion Destination Original commit dates are not preserved by default. convert.svn.dangerous-set-commit-dates preserve original commit dates, forcefully setting svn:date revision properties. This option is DANGEROUS and may break some subversion functionality for the resulting repository (e.g. filtering revisions with date ranges in svn log), as original commit dates are not guaranteed to be monotonically increasing. For commit dates setting to work destination repository must have pre-revprop-change hook configured to allow setting of svn:date revision properties. See Subversion documentation for more details. Options: --authors <FILE> username mapping filename (DEPRECATED) (use --authormap instead) -s,--source-type <TYPE> source repository type -d,--dest-type <TYPE> destination repository type -r,--rev <REV[+]> import up to source revision REV -A,--authormap <FILE> remap usernames using this file --filemap <FILE> remap file names using contents of file --full apply filemap changes by converting all files again --splicemap <FILE> splice synthesized history into place --branchmap <FILE> change branch names while converting --branchsort try to sort changesets by branches --datesort try to sort changesets by date --sourcesort preserve source changesets order --closesort try to reorder closed revisions [+] marked option can be specified multiple times eol automatically manage newlines in repository files This extension allows you to manage the type of line endings (CRLF or LF) that are used in the repository and in the local working directory. That way you can get CRLF line endings on Windows and LF on Unix/Mac, thereby letting everybody use their OS native line endings. The extension reads its configuration from a versioned .hgeol configuration file found in the root of the working directory. The .hgeol file use the same syntax as all other Mercurial configuration files. It uses two sections, [patterns] and [repository]. The [patterns] section specifies how line endings should be converted between the working di‐ rectory and the repository. The format is specified by a file pattern. The first match is used, so put more specific patterns first. The available line endings are LF, CRLF, and BIN. Files with the declared format of CRLF or LF are always checked out and stored in the reposi‐ tory in that format and files declared to be binary (BIN) are left unchanged. Additionally, native is an alias for checking out in the platform's default line ending: LF on Unix (in‐ cluding Mac OS X) and CRLF on Windows. Note that BIN (do nothing to line endings) is Mercu‐ rial's default behavior; it is only needed if you need to override a later, more general pat‐ tern. The optional [repository] section specifies the line endings to use for files stored in the repository. It has a single setting, native, which determines the storage line endings for files declared as native in the [patterns] section. It can be set to LF or CRLF. The default is LF. For example, this means that on Windows, files configured as native (CRLF by default) will be converted to LF when stored in the repository. Files declared as LF, CRLF, or BIN in the [patterns] section are always stored as-is in the repository. Example versioned .hgeol file: [patterns] **.py = native **.vcproj = CRLF **.txt = native Makefile = LF **.jpg = BIN [repository] native = LF Note The rules will first apply when files are touched in the working directory, e.g. by updating to null and back to tip to touch all files. The extension uses an optional [eol] section read from both the normal Mercurial configura‐ tion files and the .hgeol file, with the latter overriding the former. You can use that sec‐ tion to control the overall behavior. There are three settings: • eol.native (default os.linesep) can be set to LF or CRLF to override the default interpre‐ tation of native for checkout. This can be used with hg archive on Unix, say, to generate an archive where files have line endings for Windows. • eol.only-consistent (default True) can be set to False to make the extension convert files with inconsistent EOLs. Inconsistent means that there is both CRLF and LF present in the file. Such files are normally not touched under the assumption that they have mixed EOLs on purpose. • eol.fix-trailing-newline (default False) can be set to True to ensure that converted files end with a EOL character (either \n or \r\n as per the configured patterns). The extension provides cleverencode: and cleverdecode: filters like the deprecated win32text extension does. This means that you can disable win32text and enable eol and your filters will still work. You only need to these filters until you have prepared a .hgeol file. The win32text.forbid* hooks provided by the win32text extension have been unified into a sin‐ gle hook named eol.checkheadshook. The hook will lookup the expected line endings from the .hgeol file, which means you must migrate to a .hgeol file first before using the hook. eol.checkheadshook only checks heads, intermediate invalid revisions will be pushed. To for‐ bid them completely, use the eol.checkallhook hook. These hooks are best used as pretxn‐‐ changegroup hooks. See hg help patterns for more information about the glob patterns used. extdiff command to allow external programs to compare revisions The extdiff Mercurial extension allows you to use external programs to compare revisions, or revision with working directory. The external diff programs are called with a configurable set of options and two non-option arguments: paths to directories containing snapshots of files to compare. If there is more than one file being compared and the "child" revision is the working direc‐ tory, any modifications made in the external diff program will be copied back to the working directory from the temporary directory. The extdiff extension also allows you to configure new diff commands, so you do not need to type hg extdiff -p kdiff3 always. [extdiff] # add new command that runs GNU diff(1) in 'context diff' mode cdiff = gdiff -Nprc5 ## or the old way: #cmd.cdiff = gdiff #opts.cdiff = -Nprc5 # add new command called meld, runs meld (no need to name twice). If # the meld executable is not available, the meld tool in [merge-tools] # will be used, if available meld = # add new command called vimdiff, runs gvimdiff with DirDiff plugin # (see http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=102) Non # English user, be sure to put "let g:DirDiffDynamicDiffText = 1" in # your .vimrc vimdiff = gvim -f "+next" \ "+execute 'DirDiff' fnameescape(argv(0)) fnameescape(argv(1))" Tool arguments can include variables that are expanded at runtime: $parent1, $plabel1 - filename, descriptive label of first parent $child, $clabel - filename, descriptive label of child revision $parent2, $plabel2 - filename, descriptive label of second parent $root - repository root $parent is an alias for $parent1. The extdiff extension will look in your [diff-tools] and [merge-tools] sections for diff tool arguments, when none are specified in [extdiff]. [extdiff] kdiff3 = [diff-tools] kdiff3.diffargs=--L1 '$plabel1' --L2 '$clabel' $parent $child If a program has a graphical interface, it might be interesting to tell Mercurial about it. It will prevent the program from being mistakenly used in a terminal-only environment (such as an SSH terminal session), and will make hg extdiff --per-file open multiple file diffs at once instead of one by one (if you still want to open file diffs one by one, you can use the --confirm option). Declaring that a tool has a graphical interface can be done with the gui flag next to where diffargs are specified: [diff-tools] kdiff3.diffargs=--L1 '$plabel1' --L2 '$clabel' $parent $child kdiff3.gui = true You can use -I/-X and list of file or directory names like normal hg diff command. The extd‐ iff extension makes snapshots of only needed files, so running the external diff program will actually be pretty fast (at least faster than having to compare the entire tree). Commands File content management extdiff use external program to diff repository (or selected files): hg extdiff [OPT]... [FILE]... Show differences between revisions for the specified files, using an external program. The default program used is diff, with default options "-Npru". To select a different program, use the -p/--program option. The program will be passed the names of two directories to compare, unless the --per-file option is specified (see below). To pass additional options to the program, use -o/--option. These will be passed before the names of the directories or files to compare. The --from, --to, and --change options work the same way they do for hg diff. The --per-file option runs the external program repeatedly on each file to diff, instead of once on two directories. By default, this happens one by one, where the next file diff is open in the external program only once the previous external program (for the previous file diff) has exited. If the external program has a graphical interface, it can open all the file diffs at once instead of one by one. See hg help -e extdiff for information about how to tell Mercurial that a given program has a graphical interface. The --confirm option will prompt the user before each invocation of the external program. It is ignored if --per-file isn't specified. Options: -p,--program <CMD> comparison program to run -o,--option <OPT[+]> pass option to comparison program -r,--rev <REV[+]> revision (DEPRECATED) --from <REV1> revision to diff from --to <REV2> revision to diff to -c,--change <REV> change made by revision --per-file compare each file instead of revision snapshots --confirm prompt user before each external program invocation --patch compare patches for two revisions -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories [+] marked option can be specified multiple times factotum http authentication with factotum This extension allows the factotum(4) facility on Plan 9 from Bell Labs platforms to provide authentication information for HTTP access. Configuration entries specified in the auth sec‐ tion as well as authentication information provided in the repository URL are fully sup‐ ported. If no prefix is specified, a value of "*" will be assumed. By default, keys are specified as: proto=pass service=hg prefix=<prefix> user=<username> !password=<password> If the factotum extension is unable to read the required key, one will be requested interac‐ tively. A configuration section is available to customize runtime behavior. By default, these entries are: [factotum] executable = /bin/auth/factotum mountpoint = /mnt/factotum service = hg The executable entry defines the full path to the factotum binary. The mountpoint entry de‐ fines the path to the factotum file service. Lastly, the service entry controls the service name used when reading keys. fastannotate yet another annotate implementation that might be faster (EXPERIMENTAL) The fastannotate extension provides a 'fastannotate' command that makes use of the linelog data structure as a cache layer and is expected to be faster than the vanilla 'annotate' if the cache is present. In most cases, fastannotate requires a setup that mainbranch is some pointer that always moves forward, to be most efficient. Using fastannotate together with linkrevcache would speed up building the annotate cache greatly. Run "debugbuildlinkrevcache" before "debugbuildannotatecache". [fastannotate] # specify the main branch head. the internal linelog will only contain # the linear (ignoring p2) "mainbranch". since linelog cannot move # backwards without a rebuild, this should be something that always moves # forward, usually it is "master" or "@". mainbranch = master # fastannotate supports different modes to expose its feature. # a list of combination: # - fastannotate: expose the feature via the "fastannotate" command which # deals with everything in a most efficient way, and provides extra # features like --deleted etc. # - fctx: replace fctx.annotate implementation. note: # a. it is less efficient than the "fastannotate" command # b. it will make it practically impossible to access the old (disk # side-effect free) annotate implementation # c. it implies "hgweb". # - hgweb: replace hgweb's annotate implementation. conflict with "fctx". # (default: fastannotate) modes = fastannotate # default format when no format flags are used (default: number) defaultformat = changeset, user, date # serve the annotate cache via wire protocol (default: False) # tip: the .hg/fastannotate directory is portable - can be rsynced server = True # build annotate cache on demand for every client request (default: True) # disabling it could make server response faster, useful when there is a # cronjob building the cache. serverbuildondemand = True # update local annotate cache from remote on demand client = False # path to use when connecting to the remote server (default: default) remotepath = default # minimal length of the history of a file required to fetch linelog from # the server. (default: 10) clientfetchthreshold = 10 # for "fctx" mode, always follow renames regardless of command line option. # this is a BC with the original command but will reduced the space needed # for annotate cache, and is useful for client-server setup since the # server will only provide annotate cache with default options (i.e. with # follow). do not affect "fastannotate" mode. (default: True) forcefollow = True # for "fctx" mode, always treat file as text files, to skip the "isbinary" # check. this is consistent with the "fastannotate" command and could help # to avoid a file fetch if remotefilelog is used. (default: True) forcetext = True # use unfiltered repo for better performance. unfilteredrepo = True # sacrifice correctness in some corner cases for performance. it does not # affect the correctness of the annotate cache being built. the option # is experimental and may disappear in the future (default: False) perfhack = True Commands Uncategorized commands fastexport export repositories as git fast-import stream Commands Change import/export fastexport export repository as git fast-import stream: hg fastexport [OPTION]... [REV]... This command lets you dump a repository as a human-readable text stream. It can be piped into corresponding import routines like "git fast-import". Incremental dumps can be created by using marks files. Options: -r,--rev <REV[+]> revisions to export -i,--import-marks <FILE> old marks file to read -e,--export-marks <FILE> new marks file to write -A,--authormap <FILE> remap usernames using this file [+] marked option can be specified multiple times fetch pull, update and merge in one command (DEPRECATED) Commands Remote repository management fetch pull changes from a remote repository, merge new changes if needed.: hg fetch [SOURCE] This finds all changes from the repository at the specified path or URL and adds them to the local repository. If the pulled changes add a new branch head, the head is automatically merged, and the result of the merge is committed. Otherwise, the working directory is updated to include the new changes. When a merge is needed, the working directory is first updated to the newly pulled changes. Local changes are then merged into the pulled changes. To switch the merge order, use --switch-parent. See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date. Returns 0 on success. Options: -r,--rev <REV[+]> a specific revision you would like to pull --edit invoke editor on commit messages --force-editor edit commit message (DEPRECATED) --switch-parent switch parents when merging -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -l,--logfile <FILE> read commit message from file -d,--date <DATE> record the specified date as commit date -u,--user <USER> record the specified user as committer -e,--ssh <CMD> specify ssh command to use --remotecmd <CMD> specify hg command to run on the remote side --insecure do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config) [+] marked option can be specified multiple times fix rewrite file content in changesets or working copy (EXPERIMENTAL) Provides a command that runs configured tools on the contents of modified files, writing back any fixes to the working copy or replacing changesets. Here is an example configuration that causes hg fix to apply automatic formatting fixes to modified lines in C++ code: [fix] clang-format:command=clang-format --assume-filename={rootpath} clang-format:linerange=--lines={first}:{last} clang-format:pattern=set:**.cpp or **.hpp The :command suboption forms the first part of the shell command that will be used to fix a file. The content of the file is passed on standard input, and the fixed file content is ex‐ pected on standard output. Any output on standard error will be displayed as a warning. If the exit status is not zero, the file will not be affected. A placeholder warning is dis‐ played if there is a non-zero exit status but no standard error output. Some values may be substituted into the command: {rootpath} The path of the file being fixed, relative to the repo root {basename} The name of the file being fixed, without the directory path If the :linerange suboption is set, the tool will only be run if there are changed lines in a file. The value of this suboption is appended to the shell command once for every range of changed lines in the file. Some values may be substituted into the command: {first} The 1-based line number of the first line in the modified range {last} The 1-based line number of the last line in the modified range Deleted sections of a file will be ignored by :linerange, because there is no corresponding line range in the version being fixed. By default, tools that set :linerange will only be executed if there is at least one changed line range. This is meant to prevent accidents like running a code formatter in such a way that it unexpectedly reformats the whole file. If such a tool needs to operate on unchanged files, it should set the :skipclean suboption to false. The :pattern suboption determines which files will be passed through each configured tool. See hg help patterns for possible values. However, all patterns are relative to the repo root, even if that text says they are relative to the current working directory. If there are file arguments to hg fix, the intersection of these patterns is used. There is also a configurable limit for the maximum size of file that will be processed by hg fix: [fix] maxfilesize = 2MB Normally, execution of configured tools will continue after a failure (indicated by a non-zero exit status). It can also be configured to abort after the first such failure, so that no files will be affected if any tool fails. This abort will also cause hg fix to exit with a non-zero status: [fix] failure = abort When multiple tools are configured to affect a file, they execute in an order defined by the :priority suboption. The priority suboption has a default value of zero for each tool. Tools are executed in order of descending priority. The execution order of tools with equal prior‐ ity is unspecified. For example, you could use the 'sort' and 'head' utilities to keep only the 10 smallest numbers in a text file by ensuring that 'sort' runs before 'head': [fix] sort:command = sort -n head:command = head -n 10 sort:pattern = numbers.txt head:pattern = numbers.txt sort:priority = 2 head:priority = 1 To account for changes made by each tool, the line numbers used for incremental formatting are recomputed before executing the next tool. So, each tool may see different values for the arguments added by the :linerange suboption. Each fixer tool is allowed to return some metadata in addition to the fixed file content. The metadata must be placed before the file content on stdout, separated from the file content by a zero byte. The metadata is parsed as a JSON value (so, it should be UTF-8 encoded and con‐ tain no zero bytes). A fixer tool is expected to produce this metadata encoding if and only if the :metadata suboption is true: [fix] tool:command = tool --prepend-json-metadata tool:metadata = true The metadata values are passed to hooks, which can be used to print summaries or perform other post-fixing work. The supported hooks are: "postfixfile" Run once for each file in each revision where any fixer tools made changes to the file content. Provides "$HG_REV" and "$HG_PATH" to identify the file, and "$HG_METADATA" with a map of fixer names to metadata values from fixer tools that affected the file. Fixer tools that didn't affect the file have a value of None. Only fixer tools that executed are present in the metadata. "postfix" Run once after all files and revisions have been handled. Provides "$HG_REPLACEMENTS" with information about what revisions were created and made obsolete. Provides a boolean "$HG_WDIRWRITTEN" to indicate whether any files in the working copy were updated. Provides a list "$HG_METADATA" mapping fixer tool names to lists of metadata values returned from executions that modified a file. This aggregates the same metadata previously passed to the "postfixfile" hook. Fixer tools are run in the repository's root directory. This allows them to read configura‐ tion files from the working copy, or even write to the working copy. The working copy is not updated to match the revision being fixed. In fact, several revisions may be fixed in paral‐ lel. Writes to the working copy are not amended into the revision being fixed; fixer tools should always write fixed file content back to stdout as documented above. Commands File content management fix rewrite file content in changesets or working directory: hg fix [OPTION]... [FILE]... Runs any configured tools to fix the content of files. Only affects files with changes, un‐ less file arguments are provided. Only affects changed lines of files, unless the --whole flag is used. Some tools may always affect the whole file regardless of --whole. If --working-dir is used, files with uncommitted changes in the working copy will be fixed. Note that no backup are made. If revisions are specified with --source, those revisions and their descendants will be checked, and they may be replaced with new revisions that have fixed file content. By auto‐ matically including the descendants, no merging, rebasing, or evolution will be required. If an ancestor of the working copy is included, then the working copy itself will also be fixed, and the working copy will be updated to the fixed parent. When determining what lines of each file to fix at each revision, the whole set of revisions being fixed is considered, so that fixes to earlier revisions are not forgotten in later ones. The --base flag can be used to override this default behavior, though it is not usually desirable to do so. Options: --all fix all non-public non-obsolete revisions --base <REV[+]> revisions to diff against (overrides automatic selection, and applies to every revi‐ sion being fixed) -r,--rev <REV[+]> revisions to fix (ADVANCED) -s,--source <REV[+]> fix the specified revisions and their descendants -w, --working-dir fix the working directory --whole always fix every line of a file [+] marked option can be specified multiple times fsmonitor Faster status operations with the Watchman file monitor (EXPERIMENTAL) Integrates the file-watching program Watchman with Mercurial to produce faster status re‐ sults. On a particular Linux system, for a real-world repository with over 400,000 files hosted on ext4, vanilla hg status takes 1.3 seconds. On the same system, with fsmonitor it takes about 0.3 seconds. fsmonitor requires no configuration -- it will tell Watchman about your repository as neces‐ sary. You'll need to install Watchman from https://facebook.github.io/watchman/ and make sure it is in your PATH. fsmonitor is incompatible with the largefiles and eol extensions, and will disable itself if any of those are active. The following configuration options exist: [fsmonitor] mode = {off, on, paranoid} When mode = off, fsmonitor will disable itself (similar to not loading the extension at all). When mode = on, fsmonitor will be enabled (the default). When mode = paranoid, fsmonitor will query both Watchman and the filesystem, and ensure that the results are consistent. [fsmonitor] timeout = (float) A value, in seconds, that determines how long fsmonitor will wait for Watchman to return re‐ sults. Defaults to 2.0. [fsmonitor] blacklistusers = (list of userids) A list of usernames for which fsmonitor will disable itself altogether. [fsmonitor] walk_on_invalidate = (boolean) Whether or not to walk the whole repo ourselves when our cached state has been invalidated, for example when Watchman has been restarted or .hgignore rules have been changed. Walking the repo in that case can result in competing for I/O with Watchman. For large repos it is recommended to set this value to false. You may wish to set this to true if you have a very fast filesystem that can outpace the IPC overhead of getting the result data for the full repo from Watchman. Defaults to false. [fsmonitor] warn_when_unused = (boolean) Whether to print a warning during certain operations when fsmonitor would be beneficial to performance but isn't enabled. [fsmonitor] warn_update_file_count = (integer) # or when mercurial is built with rust support warn_update_file_count_rust = (integer) If warn_when_unused is set and fsmonitor isn't enabled, a warning will be printed during working directory updates if this many files will be created. git grant Mercurial the ability to operate on Git repositories. (EXPERIMENTAL) This is currently super experimental. It probably will consume your firstborn a la Rumpel‐ stiltskin, etc. githelp try mapping git commands to Mercurial commands Tries to map a given git command to a Mercurial command: $ hg githelp -- git checkout master hg update master If an unknown command or parameter combination is detected, an error is produced. Commands Help githelp suggests the Mercurial equivalent of the given git command: hg githelp Usage: hg githelp -- <git command> aliases: git gpg commands to sign and verify changesets Commands Signing changes (GPG) sigcheck verify all the signatures there may be for a particular revision: hg sigcheck REV verify all the signatures there may be for a particular revision sign add a signature for the current or given revision: hg sign [OPTION]... [REV]... If no revision is given, the parent of the working directory is used, or tip if no revision is checked out. The gpg.cmd config setting can be used to specify the command to run. A default key can be specified with gpg.key. See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date. Options: -l, --local make the signature local -f, --force sign even if the sigfile is modified --no-commit do not commit the sigfile after signing -k,--key <ID> the key id to sign with -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages -d,--date <DATE> record the specified date as commit date -u,--user <USER> record the specified user as committer sigs list signed changesets: hg sigs list signed changesets graphlog command to view revision graphs from a shell (DEPRECATED) The functionality of this extension has been include in core Mercurial since version 2.3. Please use hg log -G ... instead. This extension adds a --graph option to the incoming, outgoing and log commands. When this options is given, an ASCII representation of the revision graph is also shown. Commands Change navigation glog show revision history alongside an ASCII revision graph: hg glog [OPTION]... [FILE] Print a revision history alongside a revision graph drawn with ASCII characters. Nodes printed as an @ character are parents of the working directory. This is an alias to hg log -G. Options: -f, --follow follow changeset history, or file history across copies and renames --follow-first only follow the first parent of merge changesets (DEPRECATED) -d,--date <DATE> show revisions matching date spec -C, --copies show copied files -k,--keyword <TEXT[+]> do case-insensitive search for a given text -r,--rev <REV[+]> show the specified revision or revset --removed include revisions where files were removed -m, --only-merges show only merges (DEPRECATED) -u,--user <USER[+]> revisions committed by user --only-branch <BRANCH[+]> show only changesets within the given named branch (DEPRECATED) -b,--branch <BRANCH[+]> show changesets within the given named branch -P,--prune <REV[+]> do not display revision or any of its ancestors -p, --patch show patch -g, --git use git extended diff format -l,--limit <NUM> limit number of changes displayed -M, --no-merges do not show merges --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes -G, --graph show the revision DAG --style <STYLE> display using template map file (DEPRECATED) -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times hgk browse the repository in a graphical way The hgk extension allows browsing the history of a repository in a graphical way. It requires Tcl/Tk version 8.4 or later. (Tcl/Tk is not distributed with Mercurial.) hgk consists of two parts: a Tcl script that does the displaying and querying of information, and an extension to Mercurial named hgk.py, which provides hooks for hgk to get information. hgk can be found in the contrib directory, and the extension is shipped in the hgext reposi‐ tory, and needs to be enabled. The hg view command will launch the hgk Tcl script. For this command to work, hgk must be in your search path. Alternately, you can specify the path to hgk in your configuration file: [hgk] path = /location/of/hgk hgk can make use of the extdiff extension to visualize revisions. Assuming you had already configured extdiff vdiff command, just add: [hgk] vdiff=vdiff Revisions context menu will now display additional entries to fire vdiff on hovered and se‐ lected revisions. Commands Change navigation view start interactive history viewer: hg view [-l LIMIT] [REVRANGE] start interactive history viewer Options: -l,--limit <NUM> limit number of changes displayed Uncategorized commands highlight syntax highlighting for hgweb (requires Pygments) It depends on the Pygments syntax highlighting library: http://pygments.org/ There are the following configuration options: [web] pygments_style = <style> (default: colorful) highlightfiles = <fileset> (default: size('<5M')) highlightonlymatchfilename = <bool> (default False) highlightonlymatchfilename will only highlight files if their type could be identified by their filename. When this is not enabled (the default), Pygments will try very hard to iden‐ tify the file type from content and any match (even matches with a low confidence score) will be used. histedit interactive history editing With this extension installed, Mercurial gains one new command: histedit. Usage is as fol‐ lows, assuming the following history: @ 3[tip] 7c2fd3b9020c 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42 | Add delta | o 2 030b686bedc4 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42 | Add gamma | o 1 c561b4e977df 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42 | Add beta | o 0 d8d2fcd0e319 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42 Add alpha If you were to run hg histedit c561b4e977df, you would see the following file open in your editor: pick c561b4e977df Add beta pick 030b686bedc4 Add gamma pick 7c2fd3b9020c Add delta # Edit history between c561b4e977df and 7c2fd3b9020c # # Commits are listed from least to most recent # # Commands: # p, pick = use commit # e, edit = use commit, but allow edits before making new commit # f, fold = use commit, but combine it with the one above # r, roll = like fold, but discard this commit's description and date # d, drop = remove commit from history # m, mess = edit commit message without changing commit content # b, base = checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there # In this file, lines beginning with # are ignored. You must specify a rule for each revision in your history. For example, if you had meant to add gamma before beta, and then wanted to add delta in the same revision as beta, you would reorganize the file to look like this: pick 030b686bedc4 Add gamma pick c561b4e977df Add beta fold 7c2fd3b9020c Add delta # Edit history between c561b4e977df and 7c2fd3b9020c # # Commits are listed from least to most recent # # Commands: # p, pick = use commit # e, edit = use commit, but allow edits before making new commit # f, fold = use commit, but combine it with the one above # r, roll = like fold, but discard this commit's description and date # d, drop = remove commit from history # m, mess = edit commit message without changing commit content # b, base = checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there # At which point you close the editor and histedit starts working. When you specify a fold op‐ eration, histedit will open an editor when it folds those revisions together, offering you a chance to clean up the commit message: Add beta *** Add delta Edit the commit message to your liking, then close the editor. The date used for the commit will be the later of the two commits' dates. For this example, let's assume that the commit message was changed to Add beta and delta. After histedit has run and had a chance to remove any old or temporary revisions it needed, the history looks like this: @ 2[tip] 989b4d060121 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42 | Add beta and delta. | o 1 081603921c3f 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42 | Add gamma | o 0 d8d2fcd0e319 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42 Add alpha Note that histedit does not remove any revisions (even its own temporary ones) until after it has completed all the editing operations, so it will probably perform several strip opera‐ tions when it's done. For the above example, it had to run strip twice. Strip can be slow de‐ pending on a variety of factors, so you might need to be a little patient. You can choose to keep the original revisions by passing the --keep flag. The edit operation will drop you back to a command prompt, allowing you to edit files freely, or even use hg record to commit some changes as a separate commit. When you're done, any re‐ maining uncommitted changes will be committed as well. When done, run hg histedit --continue to finish this step. If there are uncommitted changes, you'll be prompted for a new commit message, but the default commit message will be the original message for the edit ed revi‐ sion, and the date of the original commit will be preserved. The message operation will give you a chance to revise a commit message without changing the contents. It's a shortcut for doing edit immediately followed by hg histedit --continue`. If histedit encounters a conflict when moving a revision (while handling pick or fold), it'll stop in a similar manner to edit with the difference that it won't prompt you for a commit message when done. If you decide at this point that you don't like how much work it will be to rearrange history, or that you made a mistake, you can use hg histedit --abort to abandon the new changes you have made and return to the state before you attempted to edit your his‐ tory. If we clone the histedit-ed example repository above and add four more changes, such that we have the following history: @ 6[tip] 038383181893 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 stefan | Add theta | o 5 140988835471 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 stefan | Add eta | o 4 122930637314 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 stefan | Add zeta | o 3 836302820282 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 stefan | Add epsilon | o 2 989b4d060121 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42 | Add beta and delta. | o 1 081603921c3f 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42 | Add gamma | o 0 d8d2fcd0e319 2009-04-27 18:04 -0500 durin42 Add alpha If you run hg histedit --outgoing on the clone then it is the same as running hg histedit 836302820282. If you need plan to push to a repository that Mercurial does not detect to be related to the source repo, you can add a --force option. Config Histedit rule lines are truncated to 80 characters by default. You can customize this behav‐ ior by setting a different length in your configuration file: [histedit] linelen = 120 # truncate rule lines at 120 characters The summary of a change can be customized as well: [histedit] summary-template = '{rev} {bookmarks} {desc|firstline}' The customized summary should be kept short enough that rule lines will fit in the configured line length. See above if that requires customization. hg histedit attempts to automatically choose an appropriate base revision to use. To change which base revision is used, define a revset in your configuration file: [histedit] defaultrev = only(.) & draft() By default each edited revision needs to be present in histedit commands. To remove revision you need to use drop operation. You can configure the drop to be implicit for missing commits by adding: [histedit] dropmissing = True By default, histedit will close the transaction after each action. For performance purposes, you can configure histedit to use a single transaction across the entire histedit. WARNING: This setting introduces a significant risk of losing the work you've done in a histedit if the histedit aborts unexpectedly: [histedit] singletransaction = True Commands Change manipulation histedit interactively edit changeset history: hg histedit [OPTIONS] ([ANCESTOR] | --outgoing [URL]) This command lets you edit a linear series of changesets (up to and including the working di‐ rectory, which should be clean). You can: • pick to [re]order a changeset • drop to omit changeset • mess to reword the changeset commit message • fold to combine it with the preceding changeset (using the later date) • roll like fold, but discarding this commit's description and date • edit to edit this changeset (preserving date) • base to checkout changeset and apply further changesets from there There are a number of ways to select the root changeset: • Specify ANCESTOR directly • Use --outgoing -- it will be the first linear changeset not included in destination. (See hg help config.paths.default-push) • Otherwise, the value from the "histedit.defaultrev" config option is used as a revset to select the base revision when ANCESTOR is not specified. The first revision returned by the revset is used. By default, this selects the editable history that is unique to the ances‐ try of the working directory. If you use --outgoing, this command will abort if there are ambiguous outgoing revisions. For example, if there are multiple branches containing outgoing revisions. Use "min(outgoing() and ::.)" or similar revset specification instead of --outgoing to spec‐ ify edit target revision exactly in such ambiguous situation. See hg help revsets for detail about selecting revisions. Examples: • A number of changes have been made. Revision 3 is no longer needed. Start history editing from revision 3: hg histedit -r 3 An editor opens, containing the list of revisions, with specific actions specified: pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog pick 0a9639fcda9d 5 Morgify the cromulancy Additional information about the possible actions to take appears below the list of re‐ visions. To remove revision 3 from the history, its action (at the beginning of the relevant line) is changed to 'drop': drop 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog pick 0a9639fcda9d 5 Morgify the cromulancy • A number of changes have been made. Revision 2 and 4 need to be swapped. Start history editing from revision 2: hg histedit -r 2 An editor opens, containing the list of revisions, with specific actions specified: pick 252a1af424ad 2 Blorb a morgwazzle pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog To swap revision 2 and 4, its lines are swapped in the editor: pick 8ef592ce7cc4 4 Bedazzle the zerlog pick 5339bf82f0ca 3 Zworgle the foobar pick 252a1af424ad 2 Blorb a morgwazzle Returns 0 on success, 1 if user intervention is required (not only for intentional "edit" command, but also for resolving unexpected conflicts). Options: --commands <FILE> read history edits from the specified file -c, --continue continue an edit already in progress --edit-plan edit remaining actions list -k, --keep don't strip old nodes after edit is complete --abort abort an edit in progress -o, --outgoing changesets not found in destination -f, --force force outgoing even for unrelated repositories -r,--rev <REV[+]> first revision to be edited -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template [+] marked option can be specified multiple times hooklib collection of simple hooks for common tasks (EXPERIMENTAL) This extension provides a number of simple hooks to handle issues commonly found in reposito‐ ries with many contributors: - email notification when changesets move from draft to public phase - email notification when changesets are obsoleted - enforcement of draft phase for all incoming changesets - enforcement of a no-branch-merge policy - enforcement of a no-multi‐ ple-heads policy The implementation of the hooks is subject to change, e.g. whether to implement them as indi‐ vidual hooks or merge them into the notify extension as option. The functionality itself is planned to be supported long-term. infinitepush store some pushes in a remote blob store on the server (EXPERIMENTAL) IMPORTANT: if you use this extension, please contact mercurial-devel AT mercurial-scm.org ASAP. This extension is believed to be unused and barring learning of users of this functionality, we will delete this code at the end of 2020. [infinitepush] # Server-side and client-side option. Pattern of the infinitepush bookmark branchpattern = PATTERN # Server or client server = False # Server-side option. Possible values: 'disk' or 'sql'. Fails if not set indextype = disk # Server-side option. Used only if indextype=sql. # Format: 'IP:PORT:DB_NAME:USER:PASS‐ WORD' sqlhost = IP:PORT:DB_NAME:USER:PASSWORD # Server-side option. Used only if indextype=disk. # Filesystem path to the index store indexpath = PATH # Server-side option. Possible values: 'disk' or 'external' # Fails if not set storetype = disk # Server-side option. # Path to the binary that will save bundle to the bundlestore # Formatted cmd line will be passed to it (see put_args) put_binary = put # Serser-side option. Used only if storetype=external. # Format cmd-line string for put binary. Placeholder: {filename} put_args = {filename} # Server-side option. # Path to the binary that get bundle from the bundlestore. # For‐ matted cmd line will be passed to it (see get_args) get_binary = get # Serser-side option. Used only if storetype=external. # Format cmd-line string for get binary. Placeholders: {filename} {handle} get_args = {filename} {handle} # Server-side option logfile = FIlE # Server-side option loglevel = DEBUG # Server-side option. Used only if indextype=sql. # Sets mysql wait_timeout option. waittimeout = 300 # Server-side option. Used only if indextype=sql. # Sets mysql innodb_lock_wait_timeout option. locktimeout = 120 # Server-side option. Used only if indextype=sql. # Name of the repository reponame = '' # Client-side option. Used by --list-remote option. List of remote scratch # patterns to list if no patterns are specified. defaultremotepatterns = ['*'] # Instructs infinitepush to forward all received bundle2 parts to the # bundle for stor‐ age. Defaults to False. storeallparts = True # routes each incoming push to the bundlestore. defaults to False pushtobundlestore = True [remotenames] # Client-side option # This option should be set only if remotenames exten‐ sion is enabled. # Whether remote bookmarks are tracked by remotenames extension. book‐ marks = True journal track previous positions of bookmarks (EXPERIMENTAL) This extension adds a new command: hg journal, which shows you where bookmarks were previ‐ ously located. Commands Change organization journal show the previous position of bookmarks and the working copy: hg journal [OPTION]... [BOOKMARKNAME] The journal is used to see the previous commits that bookmarks and the working copy pointed to. By default the previous locations for the working copy. Passing a bookmark name will show all the previous positions of that bookmark. Use the --all switch to show previous loca‐ tions for all bookmarks and the working copy; each line will then include the bookmark name, or '.' for the working copy, as well. If name starts with re:, the remainder of the name is treated as a regular expression. To match a name that actually starts with re:, use the prefix literal:. By default hg journal only shows the commit hash and the command that was running at that time. -v/--verbose will show the prior hash, the user, and the time at which it happened. Use -c/--commits to output log information on each commit hash; at this point you can use the usual --patch, --git, --stat and --template switches to alter the log output for these. hg journal -T json can be used to produce machine readable output. Options: --all show history for all names -c, --commits show commit metadata -p, --patch show patch -g, --git use git extended diff format -l,--limit <NUM> limit number of changes displayed --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes --style <STYLE> display using template map file (DEPRECATED) -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template keyword expand keywords in tracked files This extension expands RCS/CVS-like or self-customized $Keywords$ in tracked text files se‐ lected by your configuration. Keywords are only expanded in local repositories and not stored in the change history. The mechanism can be regarded as a convenience for the current user or for archive distribution. Keywords expand to the changeset data pertaining to the latest change relative to the working directory parent of each file. Configuration is done in the [keyword], [keywordset] and [keywordmaps] sections of hgrc files. Example: [keyword] # expand keywords in every python file except those matching "x*" **.py = x* = ignore [keywordset] # prefer svn- over cvs-like default keywordmaps svn = True Note The more specific you are in your filename patterns the less you lose speed in huge repositories. For [keywordmaps] template mapping and expansion demonstration and control run hg kwdemo. See hg help templates for a list of available templates and filters. Three additional date template filters are provided: utcdate "2006/09/18 15:13:13" svnutcdate "2006-09-18 15:13:13Z" svnisodate "2006-09-18 08:13:13 -700 (Mon, 18 Sep 2006)" The default template mappings (view with hg kwdemo -d) can be replaced with customized key‐ words and templates. Again, run hg kwdemo to control the results of your configuration changes. Before changing/disabling active keywords, you must run hg kwshrink to avoid storing expanded keywords in the change history. To force expansion after enabling it, or a configuration change, run hg kwexpand. Expansions spanning more than one line and incremental expansions, like CVS' $Log$, are not supported. A keyword template map "Log = {desc}" expands to the first line of the changeset description. Commands Uncategorized commands kwdemo print [keywordmaps] configuration and an expansion example: hg kwdemo [-d] [-f RCFILE] [TEMPLATEMAP]... Show current, custom, or default keyword template maps and their expansions. Extend the current configuration by specifying maps as arguments and using -f/--rcfile to source an external hgrc file. Use -d/--default to disable current configuration. See hg help templates for information on templates and filters. Options: -d, --default show default keyword template maps -f,--rcfile <FILE> read maps from rcfile kwexpand expand keywords in the working directory: hg kwexpand [OPTION]... [FILE]... Run after (re)enabling keyword expansion. kwexpand refuses to run if given files contain local changes. Options: -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times kwfiles show files configured for keyword expansion: hg kwfiles [OPTION]... [FILE]... List which files in the working directory are matched by the [keyword] configuration pat‐ terns. Useful to prevent inadvertent keyword expansion and to speed up execution by including only files that are actual candidates for expansion. See hg help keyword on how to construct patterns both for inclusion and exclusion of files. With -A/--all and -v/--verbose the codes used to show the status of files are: K = keyword expansion candidate k = keyword expansion candidate (not tracked) I = ignored i = ignored (not tracked) Options: -A, --all show keyword status flags of all files -i, --ignore show files excluded from expansion -u, --unknown only show unknown (not tracked) files -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times kwshrink revert expanded keywords in the working directory: hg kwshrink [OPTION]... [FILE]... Must be run before changing/disabling active keywords. kwshrink refuses to run if given files contain local changes. Options: -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times largefiles track large binary files Large binary files tend to be not very compressible, not very diffable, and not at all merge‐ able. Such files are not handled efficiently by Mercurial's storage format (revlog), which is based on compressed binary deltas; storing large binary files as regular Mercurial files wastes bandwidth and disk space and increases Mercurial's memory usage. The largefiles exten‐ sion addresses these problems by adding a centralized client-server layer on top of Mercu‐ rial: largefiles live in a central store out on the network somewhere, and you only fetch the revisions that you need when you need them. largefiles works by maintaining a "standin file" in .hglf/ for each largefile. The standins are small (41 bytes: an SHA-1 hash plus newline) and are tracked by Mercurial. Largefile re‐ visions are identified by the SHA-1 hash of their contents, which is written to the standin. largefiles uses that revision ID to get/put largefile revisions from/to the central store. This saves both disk space and bandwidth, since you don't need to retrieve all historical re‐ visions of large files when you clone or pull. To start a new repository or add new large binary files, just add --large to your hg add com‐ mand. For example: $ dd if=/dev/urandom of=randomdata count=2000 $ hg add --large randomdata $ hg commit -m "add randomdata as a largefile" When you push a changeset that adds/modifies largefiles to a remote repository, its largefile revisions will be uploaded along with it. Note that the remote Mercurial must also have the largefiles extension enabled for this to work. When you pull a changeset that affects largefiles from a remote repository, the largefiles for the changeset will by default not be pulled down. However, when you update to such a re‐ vision, any largefiles needed by that revision are downloaded and cached (if they have never been downloaded before). One way to pull largefiles when pulling is thus to use --update, which will update your working copy to the latest pulled revision (and thereby downloading any new largefiles). If you want to pull largefiles you don't need for update yet, then you can use pull with the --lfrev option or the hg lfpull command. If you know you are pulling from a non-default location and want to download all the large‐ files that correspond to the new changesets at the same time, then you can pull with --lfrev "pulled()". If you just want to ensure that you will have the largefiles needed to merge or rebase with new heads that you are pulling, then you can pull with --lfrev "head(pulled())" flag to pre-emptively download any largefiles that are new in the heads you are pulling. Keep in mind that network access may now be required to update to changesets that you have not previously updated to. The nature of the largefiles extension means that updating is no longer guaranteed to be a local-only operation. If you already have large files tracked by Mercurial without the largefiles extension, you will need to convert your repository in order to benefit from largefiles. This is done with the hg lfconvert command: $ hg lfconvert --size 10 oldrepo newrepo In repositories that already have largefiles in them, any new file over 10MB will automati‐ cally be added as a largefile. To change this threshold, set largefiles.minsize in your Mer‐ curial config file to the minimum size in megabytes to track as a largefile, or use the --lf‐ size option to the add command (also in megabytes): [largefiles] minsize = 2 $ hg add --lfsize 2 The largefiles.patterns config option allows you to specify a list of filename patterns (see hg help patterns) that should always be tracked as largefiles: [largefiles] patterns = *.jpg re:.*\.(png|bmp)$ library.zip content/audio/* Files that match one of these patterns will be added as largefiles regardless of their size. The largefiles.minsize and largefiles.patterns config options will be ignored for any reposi‐ tories not already containing a largefile. To add the first largefile to a repository, you must explicitly do so with the --large flag passed to the hg add command. Commands Uncategorized commands lfconvert convert a normal repository to a largefiles repository: hg lfconvert SOURCE DEST [FILE ...] Convert repository SOURCE to a new repository DEST, identical to SOURCE except that certain files will be converted as largefiles: specifically, any file that matches any PATTERN or whose size is above the minimum size threshold is converted as a largefile. The size used to determine whether or not to track a file as a largefile is the size of the first version of the file. The minimum size can be specified either with --size or in configuration as large‐‐ files.size. After running this command you will need to make sure that largefiles is enabled anywhere you intend to push the new repository. Use --to-normal to convert largefiles back to normal files; after this, the DEST repository can be used without largefiles at all. Options: -s,--size <SIZE> minimum size (MB) for files to be converted as largefiles --to-normal convert from a largefiles repo to a normal repo lfpull pull largefiles for the specified revisions from the specified source: hg lfpull -r REV... [-e CMD] [--remotecmd CMD] [SOURCE] Pull largefiles that are referenced from local changesets but missing locally, pulling from a remote repository to the local cache. If SOURCE is omitted, the 'default' path will be used. See hg help urls for more informa‐ tion. Some examples: • pull largefiles for all branch heads: hg lfpull -r "head() and not closed()" • pull largefiles on the default branch: hg lfpull -r "branch(default)" Options: -r,--rev <VALUE[+]> pull largefiles for these revisions -e,--ssh <CMD> specify ssh command to use --remotecmd <CMD> specify hg command to run on the remote side --insecure do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config) [+] marked option can be specified multiple times lfs lfs - large file support (EXPERIMENTAL) This extension allows large files to be tracked outside of the normal repository storage and stored on a centralized server, similar to the largefiles extension. The git-lfs protocol is used when communicating with the server, so existing git infrastructure can be harnessed. Even though the files are stored outside of the repository, they are still integrity checked in the same manner as normal files. The files stored outside of the repository are downloaded on demand, which reduces the time to clone, and possibly the local disk usage. This changes fundamental workflows in a DVCS, so careful thought should be given before deploying it. hg convert can be used to convert LFS repositories to normal repositories that no longer require this extension, and do so without changing the commit hashes. This allows the extension to be disabled if the central‐ ized workflow becomes burdensome. However, the pre and post convert clones will not be able to communicate with each other unless the extension is enabled on both. To start a new repository, or to add LFS files to an existing one, just create an .hglfs file as described below in the root directory of the repository. Typically, this file should be put under version control, so that the settings will propagate to other repositories with push and pull. During any commit, Mercurial will consult this file to determine if an added or modified file should be stored externally. The type of storage depends on the character‐ istics of the file at each commit. A file that is near a size threshold may switch back and forth between LFS and normal storage, as needed. Alternately, both normal repositories and largefile controlled repositories can be converted to LFS by using hg convert and the lfs.track config option described below. The .hglfs file should then be created and added, to control subsequent LFS selection. The hashes are also unchanged in this case. The LFS and non-LFS repositories can be distinguished because the LFS repository will abort any command if this extension is disabled. Committed LFS files are held locally, until the repository is pushed. Prior to pushing the normal repository data, the LFS files that are tracked by the outgoing commits are automati‐ cally uploaded to the configured central server. No LFS files are transferred on hg pull or hg clone. Instead, the files are downloaded on demand as they need to be read, if a cached copy cannot be found locally. Both committing and downloading an LFS file will link the file to a usercache, to speed up future access. See the usercache config setting described below. The extension reads its configuration from a versioned .hglfs configuration file found in the root of the working directory. The .hglfs file uses the same syntax as all other Mercurial configuration files. It uses a single section, [track]. The [track] section specifies which files are stored as LFS (or not). Each line is keyed by a file pattern, with a predicate value. The first file pattern match is used, so put more spe‐ cific patterns first. The available predicates are all(), none(), and size(). See "hg help filesets.size" for the latter. Example versioned .hglfs file: [track] # No Makefile or python file, anywhere, will be LFS **Makefile = none() **.py = none() **.zip = all() **.exe = size(">1MB") # Catchall for everything not matched above ** = size(">10MB") Configs: [lfs] # Remote endpoint. Multiple protocols are supported: # - http(s)://user:pass AT example.com/path # git-lfs endpoint # - file:///tmp/path # local filesystem, usually for testing # if unset, lfs will assume the remote repository also handles blob storage # for http(s) URLs. Otherwise, lfs will prompt to set this when it must # use this value. # (default: unset) url = https://example.com/repo.git/info/lfs # Which files to track in LFS. Path tests are "**.extname" for file # extensions, and "path:under/some/directory" for path prefix. Both # are relative to the repository root. # File size can be tested with the "size()" fileset, and tests can be # joined with fileset operators. (See "hg help filesets.operators".) # # Some examples: # - all() # everything # - none() # nothing # - size(">20MB") # larger than 20MB # - !**.txt # anything not a *.txt file # - **.zip | **.tar.gz | **.7z # some types of compressed files # - path:bin # files under "bin" in the project root # - (**.php & size(">2MB")) | (**.js & size(">5MB")) | **.tar.gz # | (path:bin & !path:/bin/README) | size(">1GB") # (default: none()) # # This is ignored if there is a tracked '.hglfs' file, and this setting # will eventually be deprecated and removed. track = size(">10M") # how many times to retry before giving up on transferring an object retry = 5 # the local directory to store lfs files for sharing across local clones. # If not set, the cache is located in an OS specific cache location. usercache = /path/to/global/cache Commands Uncategorized commands logtoprocess send ui.log() data to a subprocess (EXPERIMENTAL) This extension lets you specify a shell command per ui.log() event, sending all remaining ar‐ guments to as environment variables to that command. Positional arguments construct a log message, which is passed in the MSG1 environment vari‐ ables. Each keyword argument is set as a OPT_UPPERCASE_KEY variable (so the key is upper‐ cased, and prefixed with OPT_). The original event name is passed in the EVENT environment variable, and the process ID of mercurial is given in HGPID. So given a call ui.log('foo', 'bar %s ', 'baz', spam='eggs'), a script configured for the `foo event can expect an environment with MSG1=bar baz, and OPT_SPAM=eggs. Scripts are configured in the [logtoprocess] section, each key an event name. For example: [logtoprocess] commandexception = echo "$MSG1" > /var/log/mercurial_exceptions.log would log the warning message and traceback of any failed command dispatch. Scripts are run asynchronously as detached daemon processes; mercurial will not ensure that they exit cleanly. mq manage a stack of patches This extension lets you work with a stack of patches in a Mercurial repository. It manages two stacks of patches - all known patches, and applied patches (subset of known patches). Known patches are represented as patch files in the .hg/patches directory. Applied patches are both patch files and changesets. Common tasks (use hg help COMMAND for more details): create new patch qnew import existing patch qimport print patch series qseries print applied patches qapplied add known patch to applied stack qpush remove patch from applied stack qpop refresh contents of top applied patch qrefresh By default, mq will automatically use git patches when required to avoid losing file mode changes, copy records, binary files or empty files creations or deletions. This behavior can be configured with: [mq] git = auto/keep/yes/no If set to 'keep', mq will obey the [diff] section configuration while preserving existing git patches upon qrefresh. If set to 'yes' or 'no', mq will override the [diff] section and al‐ ways generate git or regular patches, possibly losing data in the second case. It may be desirable for mq changesets to be kept in the secret phase (see hg help phases), which can be enabled with the following setting: [mq] secret = True You will by default be managing a patch queue named "patches". You can create other, indepen‐ dent patch queues with the hg qqueue command. If the working directory contains uncommitted files, qpush, qpop and qgoto abort immediately. If -f/--force is used, the changes are discarded. Setting: [mq] keepchanges = True make them behave as if --keep-changes were passed, and non-conflicting local changes will be tolerated and preserved. If incompatible options such as -f/--force or --exact are passed, this setting is ignored. This extension used to provide a strip command. This command now lives in the strip exten‐ sion. Commands Repository creation qclone clone main and patch repository at same time: hg qclone [OPTION]... SOURCE [DEST] If source is local, destination will have no patches applied. If source is remote, this com‐ mand can not check if patches are applied in source, so cannot guarantee that patches are not applied in destination. If you clone remote repository, be sure before that it has no patches applied. Source patch repository is looked for in <src>/.hg/patches by default. Use -p <url> to change. The patch directory must be a nested Mercurial repository, as would be created by hg init --mq. Return 0 on success. Options: --pull use pull protocol to copy metadata -U, --noupdate do not update the new working directories --uncompressed use uncompressed transfer (fast over LAN) -p,--patches <REPO> location of source patch repository -e,--ssh <CMD> specify ssh command to use --remotecmd <CMD> specify hg command to run on the remote side --insecure do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config) qinit init a new queue repository (DEPRECATED): hg qinit [-c] The queue repository is unversioned by default. If -c/--create-repo is specified, qinit will create a separate nested repository for patches (qinit -c may also be run later to convert an unversioned patch repository into a versioned one). You can use qcommit to commit changes to this queue repository. This command is deprecated. Without -c, it's implied by other relevant commands. With -c, use hg init --mq instead. Options: -c, --create-repo create queue repository Change creation qcommit commit changes in the queue repository (DEPRECATED): hg qcommit [OPTION]... [FILE]... This command is deprecated; use hg commit --mq instead. Options: -A, --addremove mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing --close-branch mark a branch head as closed --amend amend the parent of the working directory -s, --secret use the secret phase for committing -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages --force-close-branch forcibly close branch from a non-head changeset (ADVANCED) -i, --interactive use interactive mode -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -l,--logfile <FILE> read commit message from file -d,--date <DATE> record the specified date as commit date -u,--user <USER> record the specified user as committer -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories [+] marked option can be specified multiple times aliases: qci qnew create a new patch: hg qnew [-e] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] PATCH [FILE]... qnew creates a new patch on top of the currently-applied patch (if any). The patch will be initialized with any outstanding changes in the working directory. You may also use -I/--in‐ clude, -X/--exclude, and/or a list of files after the patch name to add only changes to matching files to the new patch, leaving the rest as uncommitted modifications. -u/--user and -d/--date can be used to set the (given) user and date, respectively. -U/--cur‐ rentuser and -D/--currentdate set user to current user and date to current date. -e/--edit, -m/--message or -l/--logfile set the patch header as well as the commit message. If none is specified, the header is empty and the commit message is '[mq]: PATCH'. Use the -g/--git option to keep the patch in the git extended diff format. Read the diffs help topic for more information on why this is important for preserving permission changes and copy/rename information. Returns 0 on successful creation of a new patch. Options: -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages -f, --force import uncommitted changes (DEPRECATED) -g, --git use git extended diff format -U, --currentuser add "From: <current user>" to patch -u,--user <USER> add "From: <USER>" to patch -D, --currentdate add "Date: <current date>" to patch -d,--date <DATE> add "Date: <DATE>" to patch -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -l,--logfile <FILE> read commit message from file [+] marked option can be specified multiple times qrefresh update the current patch: hg qrefresh [-I] [-X] [-e] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] [-s] [FILE]... If any file patterns are provided, the refreshed patch will contain only the modifications that match those patterns; the remaining modifications will remain in the working directory. If -s/--short is specified, files currently included in the patch will be refreshed just like matched files and remain in the patch. If -e/--edit is specified, Mercurial will start your configured editor for you to enter a message. In case qrefresh fails, you will find a backup of your message in .hg/last-mes‐‐ sage.txt. hg add/remove/copy/rename work as usual, though you might want to use git-style patches (-g/--git or [diff] git=1) to track copies and renames. See the diffs help topic for more in‐ formation on the git diff format. Returns 0 on success. Options: -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages -g, --git use git extended diff format -s, --short refresh only files already in the patch and specified files -U, --currentuser add/update author field in patch with current user -u,--user <USER> add/update author field in patch with given user -D, --currentdate add/update date field in patch with current date -d,--date <DATE> add/update date field in patch with given date -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -l,--logfile <FILE> read commit message from file [+] marked option can be specified multiple times Change manipulation qfold fold the named patches into the current patch: hg qfold [-e] [-k] [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] PATCH... Patches must not yet be applied. Each patch will be successively applied to the current patch in the order given. If all the patches apply successfully, the current patch will be re‐ freshed with the new cumulative patch, and the folded patches will be deleted. With -k/--keep, the folded patch files will not be removed afterwards. The header for each folded patch will be concatenated with the current patch header, sepa‐ rated by a line of * * *. Returns 0 on success. Options: -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages -k, --keep keep folded patch files -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -l,--logfile <FILE> read commit message from file Change organization qapplied print the patches already applied: hg qapplied [-1] [-s] [PATCH] Returns 0 on success. Options: -1, --last show only the preceding applied patch -s, --summary print first line of patch header qdelete remove patches from queue: hg qdelete [-k] [PATCH]... The patches must not be applied, and at least one patch is required. Exact patch identifiers must be given. With -k/--keep, the patch files are preserved in the patch directory. To stop managing a patch and move it into permanent history, use the hg qfinish command. Options: -k, --keep keep patch file -r,--rev <REV[+]> stop managing a revision (DEPRECATED) [+] marked option can be specified multiple times aliases: qremove qrm qfinish move applied patches into repository history: hg qfinish [-a] [REV]... Finishes the specified revisions (corresponding to applied patches) by moving them out of mq control into regular repository history. Accepts a revision range or the -a/--applied option. If --applied is specified, all applied mq revisions are removed from mq control. Otherwise, the given revisions must be at the base of the stack of applied patches. This can be especially useful if your changes have been applied to an upstream repository, or if you are about to push your changes to upstream. Returns 0 on success. Options: -a, --applied finish all applied changesets qgoto push or pop patches until named patch is at top of stack: hg qgoto [OPTION]... PATCH Returns 0 on success. Options: --keep-changes tolerate non-conflicting local changes -f, --force overwrite any local changes --no-backup do not save backup copies of files qguard set or print guards for a patch: hg qguard [-l] [-n] [PATCH] [-- [+GUARD]... [-GUARD]...] Guards control whether a patch can be pushed. A patch with no guards is always pushed. A patch with a positive guard ("+foo") is pushed only if the hg qselect command has activated it. A patch with a negative guard ("-foo") is never pushed if the hg qselect command has ac‐ tivated it. With no arguments, print the currently active guards. With arguments, set guards for the named patch. Note Specifying negative guards now requires '--'. To set guards on another patch: hg qguard other.patch -- +2.6.17 -stable Returns 0 on success. Options: -l, --list list all patches and guards -n, --none drop all guards qheader print the header of the topmost or specified patch: hg qheader [PATCH] Returns 0 on success. qnext print the name of the next pushable patch: hg qnext [-s] Returns 0 on success. Options: -s, --summary print first line of patch header qpop pop the current patch off the stack: hg qpop [-a] [-f] [PATCH | INDEX] Without argument, pops off the top of the patch stack. If given a patch name, keeps popping off patches until the named patch is at the top of the stack. By default, abort if the working directory contains uncommitted changes. With --keep-changes, abort only if the uncommitted files overlap with patched files. With -f/--force, backup and discard changes made to such files. Return 0 on success. Options: -a, --all pop all patches -n,--name <NAME> queue name to pop (DEPRECATED) --keep-changes tolerate non-conflicting local changes -f, --force forget any local changes to patched files --no-backup do not save backup copies of files qprev print the name of the preceding applied patch: hg qprev [-s] Returns 0 on success. Options: -s, --summary print first line of patch header qpush push the next patch onto the stack: hg qpush [-f] [-l] [-a] [--move] [PATCH | INDEX] By default, abort if the working directory contains uncommitted changes. With --keep-changes, abort only if the uncommitted files overlap with patched files. With -f/--force, backup and patch over uncommitted changes. Return 0 on success. Options: --keep-changes tolerate non-conflicting local changes -f, --force apply on top of local changes -e, --exact apply the target patch to its recorded parent -l, --list list patch name in commit text -a, --all apply all patches -m, --merge merge from another queue (DEPRECATED) -n,--name <NAME> merge queue name (DEPRECATED) --move reorder patch series and apply only the patch --no-backup do not save backup copies of files qqueue manage multiple patch queues: hg qqueue [OPTION] [QUEUE] Supports switching between different patch queues, as well as creating new patch queues and deleting existing ones. Omitting a queue name or specifying -l/--list will show you the registered queues - by de‐ fault the "normal" patches queue is registered. The currently active queue will be marked with "(active)". Specifying --active will print only the name of the active queue. To create a new queue, use -c/--create. The queue is automatically made active, except in the case where there are applied patches from the currently active queue in the repository. Then the queue will only be created and switching will fail. To delete an existing queue, use --delete. You cannot delete the currently active queue. Returns 0 on success. Options: -l, --list list all available queues --active print name of active queue -c, --create create new queue --rename rename active queue --delete delete reference to queue --purge delete queue, and remove patch dir qrename rename a patch: hg qrename PATCH1 [PATCH2] With one argument, renames the current patch to PATCH1. With two arguments, renames PATCH1 to PATCH2. Returns 0 on success. aliases: qmv qrestore restore the queue state saved by a revision (DEPRECATED): hg qrestore [-d] [-u] REV This command is deprecated, use hg rebase instead. Options: -d, --delete delete save entry -u, --update update queue working directory qsave save current queue state (DEPRECATED): hg qsave [-m TEXT] [-l FILE] [-c] [-n NAME] [-e] [-f] This command is deprecated, use hg rebase instead. Options: -c, --copy copy patch directory -n,--name <NAME> copy directory name -e, --empty clear queue status file -f, --force force copy -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -l,--logfile <FILE> read commit message from file qselect set or print guarded patches to push: hg qselect [OPTION]... [GUARD]... Use the hg qguard command to set or print guards on patch, then use qselect to tell mq which guards to use. A patch will be pushed if it has no guards or any positive guards match the currently selected guard, but will not be pushed if any negative guards match the current guard. For example: qguard foo.patch -- -stable (negative guard) qguard bar.patch +stable (positive guard) qselect stable This activates the "stable" guard. mq will skip foo.patch (because it has a negative match) but push bar.patch (because it has a positive match). With no arguments, prints the currently active guards. With one argument, sets the active guard. Use -n/--none to deactivate guards (no other arguments needed). When no guards are active, patches with positive guards are skipped and patches with negative guards are pushed. qselect can change the guards on applied patches. It does not pop guarded patches by default. Use --pop to pop back to the last applied patch that is not guarded. Use --reapply (which im‐ plies --pop) to push back to the current patch afterwards, but skip guarded patches. Use -s/--series to print a list of all guards in the series file (no other arguments needed). Use -v for more information. Returns 0 on success. Options: -n, --none disable all guards -s, --series list all guards in series file --pop pop to before first guarded applied patch --reapply pop, then reapply patches qseries print the entire series file: hg qseries [-ms] Returns 0 on success. Options: -m, --missing print patches not in series -s, --summary print first line of patch header qtop print the name of the current patch: hg qtop [-s] Returns 0 on success. Options: -s, --summary print first line of patch header qunapplied print the patches not yet applied: hg qunapplied [-1] [-s] [PATCH] Returns 0 on success. Options: -1, --first show only the first patch -s, --summary print first line of patch header File content management qdiff diff of the current patch and subsequent modifications: hg qdiff [OPTION]... [FILE]... Shows a diff which includes the current patch as well as any changes which have been made in the working directory since the last refresh (thus showing what the current patch would be‐ come after a qrefresh). Use hg diff if you only want to see the changes made since the last qrefresh, or hg export qtip if you want to see changes made by the current patch without including changes made since the qrefresh. Returns 0 on success. Options: -a, --text treat all files as text -g, --git use git extended diff format (DEFAULT: diff.git) --binary generate binary diffs in git mode (default) --nodates omit dates from diff headers --noprefix omit a/ and b/ prefixes from filenames -p, --show-function show which function each change is in (DEFAULT: diff.showfunc) --reverse produce a diff that undoes the changes -w, --ignore-all-space ignore white space when comparing lines -b, --ignore-space-change ignore changes in the amount of white space -B, --ignore-blank-lines ignore changes whose lines are all blank -Z, --ignore-space-at-eol ignore changes in whitespace at EOL -U,--unified <NUM> number of lines of context to show --stat output diffstat-style summary of changes --root <DIR> produce diffs relative to subdirectory -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times Change import/export qimport import a patch or existing changeset: hg qimport [-e] [-n NAME] [-f] [-g] [-P] [-r REV]... [FILE]... The patch is inserted into the series after the last applied patch. If no patches have been applied, qimport prepends the patch to the series. The patch will have the same name as its source file unless you give it a new one with -n/--name. You can register an existing patch inside the patch directory with the -e/--existing flag. With -f/--force, an existing patch of the same name will be overwritten. An existing changeset may be placed under mq control with -r/--rev (e.g. qimport --rev . -n patch will place the current revision under mq control). With -g/--git, patches imported with --rev will use the git diff format. See the diffs help topic for information on why this is important for preserving rename/copy information and permission changes. Use hg qfinish to remove changesets from mq control. To import a patch from standard input, pass - as the patch file. When importing from stan‐ dard input, a patch name must be specified using the --name flag. To import an existing patch while renaming it: hg qimport -e existing-patch -n new-name Returns 0 if import succeeded. Options: -e, --existing import file in patch directory -n,--name <NAME> name of patch file -f, --force overwrite existing files -r,--rev <REV[+]> place existing revisions under mq control -g, --git use git extended diff format -P, --push qpush after importing [+] marked option can be specified multiple times narrow create clones which fetch history data for subset of files (EXPERIMENTAL) Commands Repository maintenance tracked show or change the current narrowspec: hg tracked [OPTIONS]... [REMOTE] With no argument, shows the current narrowspec entries, one per line. Each line will be pre‐ fixed with 'I' or 'X' for included or excluded patterns, respectively. The narrowspec is comprised of expressions to match remote files and/or directories that should be pulled into your client. The narrowspec has include and exclude expressions, with excludes always trumping includes: that is, if a file matches an exclude expression, it will be excluded even if it also matches an include expression. Excluding files that were never included has no effect. Each included or excluded entry is in the format described by 'hg help patterns'. The options allow you to add or remove included and excluded expressions. If --clear is specified, then all previous includes and excludes are DROPPED and replaced by the new ones specified to --addinclude and --addexclude. If --clear is specified without any further options, the narrowspec will be empty and will not match any files. If --auto-remove-includes is specified, then those includes that don't match any files modi‐ fied by currently visible local commits (those not shared by the remote) will be added to the set of explicitly specified includes to remove. --import-rules accepts a path to a file containing rules, allowing you to add --addinclude, --addexclude rules in bulk. Like the other include and exclude switches, the changes are ap‐ plied immediately. Options: --addinclude <VALUE[+]> new paths to include --removeinclude <VALUE[+]> old paths to no longer include --auto-remove-includes automatically choose unused includes to remove --addexclude <VALUE[+]> new paths to exclude --import-rules <VALUE> import narrowspecs from a file --removeexclude <VALUE[+]> old paths to no longer exclude --clear whether to replace the existing narrowspec --force-delete-local-changes forces deletion of local changes when narrowing --backup back up local changes when narrowing (default: True) --update-working-copy update working copy when the store has changed -e,--ssh <CMD> specify ssh command to use --remotecmd <CMD> specify hg command to run on the remote side --insecure do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config) [+] marked option can be specified multiple times notify hooks for sending email push notifications This extension implements hooks to send email notifications when changesets are sent from or received by the local repository. First, enable the extension as explained in hg help extensions, and register the hook you want to run. incoming and changegroup hooks are run when changesets are received, while out‐‐ going hooks are for changesets sent to another repository: [hooks] # one email for each incoming changeset incoming.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook # one email for all incoming changesets changegroup.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook # one email for all outgoing changesets outgoing.notify = python:hgext.notify.hook This registers the hooks. To enable notification, subscribers must be assigned to reposito‐ ries. The [usersubs] section maps multiple repositories to a given recipient. The [reposubs] section maps multiple recipients to a single repository: [usersubs] # key is subscriber email, value is a comma-separated list of repo patterns user@host = pattern [reposubs] # key is repo pattern, value is a comma-separated list of subscriber emails pattern = user@host A pattern is a glob matching the absolute path to a repository, optionally combined with a revset expression. A revset expression, if present, is separated from the glob by a hash. Ex‐ ample: [reposubs] */widgets#branch(release) = qa-team AT example.com This sends to qa-team AT example.com whenever a changeset on the release branch triggers a noti‐ fication in any repository ending in widgets. In order to place them under direct user management, [usersubs] and [reposubs] sections may be placed in a separate hgrc file and incorporated by reference: [notify] config = /path/to/subscriptionsfile Notifications will not be sent until the notify.test value is set to False; see below. Notifications content can be tweaked with the following configuration entries: notify.test If True, print messages to stdout instead of sending them. Default: True. notify.sources Space-separated list of change sources. Notifications are activated only when a changeset's source is in this list. Sources may be: serve changesets received via http or ssh pull changesets received via hg pull unbundle changesets received via hg unbundle push changesets sent or received via hg push bundle changesets sent via hg unbundle Default: serve. notify.strip Number of leading slashes to strip from url paths. By default, notifications reference repositories with their absolute path. notify.strip lets you turn them into relative paths. For example, notify.strip=3 will change /long/path/repository into repository. Default: 0. notify.domain Default email domain for sender or recipients with no explicit domain. It is also used for the domain part of the Message-Id when using notify.messageidseed. notify.messageidseed Create deterministic Message-Id headers for the mails based on the seed and the revi‐ sion identifier of the first commit in the changeset. notify.style Style file to use when formatting emails. notify.template Template to use when formatting emails. notify.incoming Template to use when run as an incoming hook, overriding notify.template. notify.outgoing Template to use when run as an outgoing hook, overriding notify.template. notify.changegroup Template to use when running as a changegroup hook, overriding notify.template. notify.maxdiff Maximum number of diff lines to include in notification email. Set to 0 to disable the diff, or -1 to include all of it. Default: 300. notify.maxdiffstat Maximum number of diffstat lines to include in notification email. Set to -1 to in‐ clude all of it. Default: -1. notify.maxsubject Maximum number of characters in email's subject line. Default: 67. notify.diffstat Set to True to include a diffstat before diff content. Default: True. notify.showfunc If set, override diff.showfunc for the diff content. Default: None. notify.merge If True, send notifications for merge changesets. Default: True. notify.mbox If set, append mails to this mbox file instead of sending. Default: None. notify.fromauthor If set, use the committer of the first changeset in a changegroup for the "From" field of the notification mail. If not set, take the user from the pushing repo. Default: False. notify.reply-to-predecessor (EXPERIMENTAL) If set and the changeset has a predecessor in the repository, try to thread the noti‐ fication mail with the predecessor. This adds the "In-Reply-To" header to the notifi‐ cation mail with a reference to the predecessor with the smallest revision number. Mail threads can still be torn, especially when changesets are folded. This option must be used in combination with notify.messageidseed. If set, the following entries will also be used to customize the notifications: email.from Email From address to use if none can be found in the generated email content. web.baseurl Root repository URL to combine with repository paths when making references. See also notify.strip. pager browse command output with an external pager (DEPRECATED) Forcibly enable paging for individual commands that don't typically request pagination with the attend-<command> option. This setting takes precedence over ignore options and defaults: [pager] attend-cat = false patchbomb command to send changesets as (a series of) patch emails The series is started off with a "[PATCH 0 of N]" introduction, which describes the series as a whole. Each patch email has a Subject line of "[PATCH M of N] ...", using the first line of the changeset description as the subject text. The message contains two or three body parts: • The changeset description. • [Optional] The result of running diffstat on the patch. • The patch itself, as generated by hg export. Each message refers to the first in the series using the In-Reply-To and References headers, so they will show up as a sequence in threaded mail and news readers, and in mail archives. To configure other defaults, add a section like this to your configuration file: [email] from = My Name <my@email> to = recipient1, recipient2, ... cc = cc1, cc2, ... bcc = bcc1, bcc2, ... reply-to = address1, address2, ... Use [patchbomb] as configuration section name if you need to override global [email] address settings. Then you can use the hg email command to mail a series of changesets as a patchbomb. You can also either configure the method option in the email section to be a sendmail compat‐ ible mailer or fill out the [smtp] section so that the patchbomb extension can automatically send patchbombs directly from the commandline. See the [email] and [smtp] sections in hgrc(5) for details. By default, hg email will prompt for a To or CC header if you do not supply one via configu‐ ration or the command line. You can override this to never prompt by configuring an empty value: [email] cc = You can control the default inclusion of an introduction message with the patchbomb.intro configuration option. The configuration is always overwritten by command line flags like --intro and --desc: [patchbomb] intro=auto # include introduction message if more than 1 patch (default) intro=never # never include an introduction message intro=always # always include an introduction message You can specify a template for flags to be added in subject prefixes. Flags specified by --flag option are exported as {flags} keyword: [patchbomb] flagtemplate = "{separate(' ', ifeq(branch, 'default', '', branch|upper), flags)}" You can set patchbomb to always ask for confirmation by setting patchbomb.confirm to true. Commands Change import/export email send changesets by email: hg email [OPTION]... [DEST]... By default, diffs are sent in the format generated by hg export, one per message. The series starts with a "[PATCH 0 of N]" introduction, which describes the series as a whole. Each patch email has a Subject line of "[PATCH M of N] ...", using the first line of the changeset description as the subject text. The message contains two or three parts. First, the changeset description. With the -d/--diffstat option, if the diffstat program is installed, the result of running diffstat on the patch is inserted. Finally, the patch itself, as generated by hg export. With the -d/--diffstat or --confirm options, you will be presented with a final summary of all messages and asked for confirmation before the messages are sent. By default the patch is included as text in the email body for easy reviewing. Using the -a/--attach option will instead create an attachment for the patch. With -i/--inline an in‐ line attachment will be created. You can include a patch both as text in the email body and as a regular or an inline attachment by combining the -a/--attach or -i/--inline with the --body option. With -B/--bookmark changesets reachable by the given bookmark are selected. With -o/--outgoing, emails will be generated for patches not found in the destination reposi‐ tory (or only those which are ancestors of the specified revisions if any are provided) With -b/--bundle, changesets are selected as for --outgoing, but a single email containing a binary Mercurial bundle as an attachment will be sent. Use the patchbomb.bundletype config option to control the bundle type as with hg bundle --type. With -m/--mbox, instead of previewing each patchbomb message in a pager or sending the mes‐ sages directly, it will create a UNIX mailbox file with the patch emails. This mailbox file can be previewed with any mail user agent which supports UNIX mbox files. With -n/--test, all steps will run, but mail will not be sent. You will be prompted for an email recipient address, a subject and an introductory message describing the patches of your patchbomb. Then when all is done, patchbomb messages are displayed. In case email sending fails, you will find a backup of your series introductory message in .hg/last-email.txt. The default behavior of this command can be customized through configuration. (See hg help patchbomb for details) Examples: hg email -r 3000 # send patch 3000 only hg email -r 3000 -r 3001 # send patches 3000 and 3001 hg email -r 3000:3005 # send patches 3000 through 3005 hg email 3000 # send patch 3000 (deprecated) hg email -o # send all patches not in default hg email -o DEST # send all patches not in DEST hg email -o -r 3000 # send all ancestors of 3000 not in default hg email -o -r 3000 DEST # send all ancestors of 3000 not in DEST hg email -B feature # send all ancestors of feature bookmark hg email -b # send bundle of all patches not in default hg email -b DEST # send bundle of all patches not in DEST hg email -b -r 3000 # bundle of all ancestors of 3000 not in default hg email -b -r 3000 DEST # bundle of all ancestors of 3000 not in DEST hg email -o -m mbox && # generate an mbox file... mutt -R -f mbox # ... and view it with mutt hg email -o -m mbox && # generate an mbox file ... formail -s sendmail \ # ... and use formail to send from the mbox -bm -t < mbox # ... using sendmail Before using this command, you will need to enable email in your hgrc. See the [email] sec‐ tion in hgrc(5) for details. Options: -g, --git use git extended diff format --plain omit hg patch header -o, --outgoing send changes not found in the target repository -b, --bundle send changes not in target as a binary bundle -B,--bookmark <BOOKMARK> send changes only reachable by given bookmark --bundlename <NAME> name of the bundle attachment file (default: bundle) -r,--rev <REV[+]> a revision to send --force run even when remote repository is unrelated (with -b/--bundle) --base <REV[+]> a base changeset to specify instead of a destination (with -b/--bundle) --intro send an introduction email for a single patch --body send patches as inline message text (default) -a, --attach send patches as attachments -i, --inline send patches as inline attachments --bcc <EMAIL[+]> email addresses of blind carbon copy recipients -c,--cc <EMAIL[+]> email addresses of copy recipients --confirm ask for confirmation before sending -d, --diffstat add diffstat output to messages --date <DATE> use the given date as the sending date --desc <FILE> use the given file as the series description -f,--from <EMAIL> email address of sender -n, --test print messages that would be sent -m,--mbox <FILE> write messages to mbox file instead of sending them --reply-to <EMAIL[+]> email addresses replies should be sent to -s,--subject <TEXT> subject of first message (intro or single patch) --in-reply-to <MSGID> message identifier to reply to --flag <FLAG[+]> flags to add in subject prefixes -t,--to <EMAIL[+]> email addresses of recipients -e,--ssh <CMD> specify ssh command to use --remotecmd <CMD> specify hg command to run on the remote side --insecure do not verify server certificate (ignoring web.cacerts config) [+] marked option can be specified multiple times phabricator simple Phabricator integration (EXPERIMENTAL) This extension provides a phabsend command which sends a stack of changesets to Phabricator, and a phabread command which prints a stack of revisions in a format suitable for hg import, and a phabupdate command to update statuses in batch. A "phabstatus" view for hg show is also provided; it displays status information of Phabrica‐ tor differentials associated with unfinished changesets. By default, Phabricator requires Test Plan which might prevent some changeset from being sent. The requirement could be disabled by changing differential.require-test-plan-field con‐ fig server side. Config: [phabricator] # Phabricator URL url = https://phab.example.com/ # Repo callsign. If a repo has a URL https://$HOST/diffusion/FOO, then its # callsign is "FOO". callsign = FOO # curl command to use. If not set (default), use builtin HTTP library to # communicate. If set, use the specified curl command. This could be useful # if you need to specify advanced options that is not easily supported by # the internal library. curlcmd = curl --connect-timeout 2 --retry 3 --silent # retry failed command N time (default 0). Useful when using the extension # over flakly connection. # # We wait `retry.interval` between each retry, in seconds. # (default 1 second). retry = 3 retry.interval = 10 # the retry option can combine well with the http.timeout one. # # For example to give up on http request after 20 seconds: [http] timeout=20 [auth] example.schemes = https example.prefix = phab.example.com # API token. Get it from https://$HOST/conduit/login/ example.phabtoken = cli-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Commands Change import/export phabimport import patches from Phabricator for the specified Differential Revisions: hg phabimport DREVSPEC... [OPTIONS] The patches are read and applied starting at the parent of the working directory. See hg help phabread for how to specify DREVSPEC. Options: --stack import dependencies as well --test-vcr <VALUE> Path to a vcr file. If nonexistent, will record a new vcr transcript, otherwise will mock all http requests using the specified vcr file. (ADVANCED) phabread print patches from Phabricator suitable for importing: hg phabread DREVSPEC... [OPTIONS] DREVSPEC could be a Differential Revision identity, like D123, or just the number 123. It could also have common operators like +, -, &, (, ) for complex queries. Prefix : could be used to select a stack. If multiple DREVSPEC values are given, the result is the union of each individually evaluated value. No attempt is currently made to reorder the values to run from parent to child. abandoned, accepted, closed, needsreview, needsrevision could be used to filter patches by status. For performance reason, they only represent a subset of non-status selections and cannot be used alone. For example, :D6+8-(2+D4) selects a stack up to D6, plus D8 and exclude D2 and D4. :D9 & needsreview selects "Needs Review" revisions in a stack up to D9. If --stack is given, follow dependencies information and read all patches. It is equivalent to the : operator. Options: --stack read dependencies --test-vcr <VALUE> Path to a vcr file. If nonexistent, will record a new vcr transcript, otherwise will mock all http requests using the specified vcr file. (ADVANCED) phabsend upload changesets to Phabricator: hg phabsend REV [OPTIONS] If there are multiple revisions specified, they will be send as a stack with a linear depen‐ dencies relationship using the order specified by the revset. For the first time uploading changesets, local tags will be created to maintain the associa‐ tion. After the first time, phabsend will check obsstore and tags information so it can fig‐ ure out whether to update an existing Differential Revision, or create a new one. If --amend is set, update commit messages so they have the Differential Revision URL, remove related tags. This is similar to what arcanist will do, and is more desired in author-push workflows. Otherwise, use local tags to record the Differential Revision association. The --confirm option lets you confirm changesets before sending them. You can also add fol‐ lowing to your configuration file to make it default behaviour: [phabsend] confirm = true By default, a separate review will be created for each commit that is selected, and will have the same parent/child relationship in Phabricator. If --fold is set, multiple commits are rolled up into a single review as if diffed from the parent of the first revision to the last. The commit messages are concatenated in the summary field on Phabricator. phabsend will check obsstore and the above association to decide whether to update an exist‐ ing Differential Revision, or create a new one. Options: -r,--rev <REV[+]> revisions to send --amend update commit messages (default: True) --reviewer <VALUE[+]> specify reviewers --blocker <VALUE[+]> specify blocking reviewers -m,--comment <VALUE> add a comment to Revisions with new/updated Diffs --confirm ask for confirmation before sending --fold combine the revisions into one review --test-vcr <VALUE> Path to a vcr file. If nonexistent, will record a new vcr transcript, otherwise will mock all http requests using the specified vcr file. (ADVANCED) [+] marked option can be specified multiple times phabupdate update Differential Revision in batch: hg phabupdate [DREVSPEC...| -r REV...] [OPTIONS] DREVSPEC selects revisions. See hg help phabread for its usage. Options: --accept accept revisions --reject reject revisions --request-review request review on revisions --abandon abandon revisions --reclaim reclaim revisions --close close revisions --reopen reopen revisions --plan-changes plan changes for revisions --resign resign as a reviewer from revisions --commandeer commandeer revisions -m,--comment <VALUE> comment on the last revision -r,--rev <REV> local revision to update --test-vcr <VALUE> Path to a vcr file. If nonexistent, will record a new vcr transcript, otherwise will mock all http requests using the specified vcr file. (ADVANCED) Uncategorized commands purge command to delete untracked files from the working directory (DEPRECATED) The functionality of this extension has been included in core Mercurial since version 5.7. Please use hg purge ... instead. hg purge --confirm is now the default, unless the extension is enabled for backward compatibility. rebase command to move sets of revisions to a different ancestor This extension lets you rebase changesets in an existing Mercurial repository. For more information: https://mercurial-scm.org/wiki/RebaseExtension Commands Change manipulation rebase move changeset (and descendants) to a different branch: hg rebase [[-s REV]... | [-b REV]... | [-r REV]...] [-d REV] [OPTION]... Rebase uses repeated merging to graft changesets from one part of history (the source) onto another (the destination). This can be useful for linearizing local changes relative to a master development tree. Published commits cannot be rebased (see hg help phases). To copy commits, see hg help graft . If you don't specify a destination changeset (-d/--dest), rebase will use the same logic as hg merge to pick a destination. if the current branch contains exactly one other head, the other head is merged with by default. Otherwise, an explicit revision with which to merge with must be provided. (destination changeset is not modified by rebasing, but new change‐ sets are added as its descendants.) Here are the ways to select changesets: 1. Explicitly select them using --rev. 2. Use --source to select a root changeset and include all of its descendants. 3. Use --base to select a changeset; rebase will find ancestors and their descendants which are not also ancestors of the destination. 4. If you do not specify any of --rev, --source, or --base, rebase will use --base . as above. If --source or --rev is used, special names SRC and ALLSRC can be used in --dest. Destination would be calculated per source revision with SRC substituted by that single source revision and ALLSRC substituted by all source revisions. Rebase will destroy original changesets unless you use --keep. It will also move your book‐ marks (even if you do). Some changesets may be dropped if they do not contribute changes (e.g. merges from the desti‐ nation branch). Unlike merge, rebase will do nothing if you are at the branch tip of a named branch with two heads. You will need to explicitly specify source and/or destination. If you need to use a tool to automate merge/conflict decisions, you can specify one with --tool, see hg help merge-tools. As a caveat: the tool will not be used to mediate when a file was deleted, there is no hook presently available for this. If a rebase is interrupted to manually resolve a conflict, it can be continued with --con‐ tinue/-c, aborted with --abort/-a, or stopped with --stop. Examples: • move "local changes" (current commit back to branching point) to the current branch tip af‐ ter a pull: hg rebase • move a single changeset to the stable branch: hg rebase -r 5f493448 -d stable • splice a commit and all its descendants onto another part of history: hg rebase --source c0c3 --dest 4cf9 • rebase everything on a branch marked by a bookmark onto the default branch: hg rebase --base myfeature --dest default • collapse a sequence of changes into a single commit: hg rebase --collapse -r 1520:1525 -d . • move a named branch while preserving its name: hg rebase -r "branch(featureX)" -d 1.3 --keepbranches • stabilize orphaned changesets so history looks linear: hg rebase -r 'orphan()-obsolete()' -d 'first(max((successors(max(roots(ALLSRC) & ::SRC)^)-obsolete())::) + max(::((roots(ALLSRC) & ::SRC)^)-obsolete()))' Configuration Options: You can make rebase require a destination if you set the following config option: [commands] rebase.requiredest = True By default, rebase will close the transaction after each commit. For performance purposes, you can configure rebase to use a single transaction across the entire rebase. WARNING: This setting introduces a significant risk of losing the work you've done in a rebase if the re‐ base aborts unexpectedly: [rebase] singletransaction = True By default, rebase writes to the working copy, but you can configure it to run in-memory for better performance. When the rebase is not moving the parent(s) of the working copy (AKA the "currently checked out changesets"), this may also allow it to run even if the working copy is dirty: [rebase] experimental.inmemory = True Return Values: Returns 0 on success, 1 if nothing to rebase or there are unresolved conflicts. Options: -s,--source <REV[+]> rebase the specified changesets and their descendants -b,--base <REV[+]> rebase everything from branching point of specified changeset -r,--rev <REV[+]> rebase these revisions -d,--dest <REV> rebase onto the specified changeset --collapse collapse the rebased changesets -m,--message <TEXT> use text as collapse commit message -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages -l,--logfile <FILE> read collapse commit message from file -k, --keep keep original changesets --keepbranches keep original branch names -D, --detach (DEPRECATED) -i, --interactive (DEPRECATED) -t,--tool <VALUE> specify merge tool --stop stop interrupted rebase -c, --continue continue an interrupted rebase -a, --abort abort an interrupted rebase --auto-orphans <VALUE> automatically rebase orphan revisions in the specified revset (EXPERIMENTAL) -n, --dry-run do not perform actions, just print output -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template --confirm ask before applying actions [+] marked option can be specified multiple times record commands to interactively select changes for commit/qrefresh (DEPRECATED) The feature provided by this extension has been moved into core Mercurial as hg commit --in‐‐ teractive. Commands Change creation qrecord interactively record a new patch: hg qrecord [OPTION]... PATCH [FILE]... See hg help qnew & hg help record for more information and usage. record interactively select changes to commit: hg record [OPTION]... [FILE]... If a list of files is omitted, all changes reported by hg status will be candidates for recording. See hg help dates for a list of formats valid for -d/--date. If using the text interface (see hg help config), you will be prompted for whether to record changes to each modified file, and for files with multiple changes, for each change to use. For each query, the following responses are possible: y - record this change n - skip this change e - edit this change manually s - skip remaining changes to this file f - record remaining changes to this file d - done, skip remaining changes and files a - record all changes to all remaining files q - quit, recording no changes ? - display help This command is not available when committing a merge. Options: -A, --addremove mark new/missing files as added/removed before committing --close-branch mark a branch head as closed --amend amend the parent of the working directory -s, --secret use the secret phase for committing -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages --force-close-branch forcibly close branch from a non-head changeset (ADVANCED) -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -l,--logfile <FILE> read commit message from file -d,--date <DATE> record the specified date as commit date -u,--user <USER> record the specified user as committer -S, --subrepos recurse into subrepositories -w, --ignore-all-space ignore white space when comparing lines -b, --ignore-space-change ignore changes in the amount of white space -B, --ignore-blank-lines ignore changes whose lines are all blank -Z, --ignore-space-at-eol ignore changes in whitespace at EOL [+] marked option can be specified multiple times releasenotes generate release notes from commit messages (EXPERIMENTAL) It is common to maintain files detailing changes in a project between releases. Maintaining these files can be difficult and time consuming. The hg releasenotes command provided by this extension makes the process simpler by automating it. Commands Change navigation releasenotes parse release notes from commit messages into an output file: hg releasenotes [-r REV] [-c] FILE Given an output file and set of revisions, this command will parse commit messages for re‐ lease notes then add them to the output file. Release notes are defined in commit messages as ReStructuredText directives. These have the form: .. directive:: title content Each directive maps to an output section in a generated release notes file, which itself is ReStructuredText. For example, the .. feature:: directive would map to a New Features sec‐ tion. Release note directives can be either short-form or long-form. In short- form, title is omit‐ ted and the release note is rendered as a bullet list. In long form, a sub-section with the title title is added to the section. The FILE argument controls the output file to write gathered release notes to. The format of the file is: Section 1 ========= ... Section 2 ========= ... Only sections with defined release notes are emitted. If a section only has short-form notes, it will consist of bullet list: Section ======= * Release note 1 * Release note 2 If a section has long-form notes, sub-sections will be emitted: Section ======= Note 1 Title ------------ Description of the first long-form note. Note 2 Title ------------ Description of the second long-form note. If the FILE argument points to an existing file, that file will be parsed for release notes having the format that would be generated by this command. The notes from the processed com‐ mit messages will be merged into this parsed set. During release notes merging: • Duplicate items are automatically ignored • Items that are different are automatically ignored if the similarity is greater than a threshold. This means that the release notes file can be updated independently from this command and changes should not be lost when running this command on that file. A particular use case for this is to tweak the wording of a release note after it has been added to the release notes file. The -c/--check option checks the commit message for invalid admonitions. The -l/--list option, presents the user with a list of existing available admonitions along with their title. This also includes the custom admonitions (if any). Options: -r,--rev <REV> revisions to process for release notes -c, --check checks for validity of admonitions (if any) -l, --list list the available admonitions with their title Uncategorized commands relink recreates hardlinks between repository clones Commands Repository maintenance relink recreate hardlinks between two repositories: hg relink [ORIGIN] When repositories are cloned locally, their data files will be hardlinked so that they only use the space of a single repository. Unfortunately, subsequent pulls into either repository will break hardlinks for any files touched by the new changesets, even if both repositories end up pulling the same changes. Similarly, passing --rev to "hg clone" will fail to use any hardlinks, falling back to a com‐ plete copy of the source repository. This command lets you recreate those hardlinks and reclaim that wasted space. This repository will be relinked to share space with ORIGIN, which must be on the same local disk. If ORIGIN is omitted, looks for "default-relink", then "default", in [paths]. Do not attempt any read operations on this repository while the command is running. (Both repositories will be locked against writes.) remotefilelog remotefilelog causes Mercurial to lazilly fetch file contents (EXPERIMENTAL) This extension is HIGHLY EXPERIMENTAL. There are NO BACKWARDS COMPATIBILITY GUARANTEES. This means that repositories created with this extension may only be usable with the exact version of this extension/Mercurial that was used. The extension attempts to enforce this in order to prevent repository corruption. remotefilelog works by fetching file contents lazily and storing them in a cache on the client rather than in revlogs. This allows enormous histories to be transferred only par‐ tially, making them easier to operate on. Configs: packs.maxchainlen specifies the maximum delta chain length in pack files packs.maxpacksize specifies the maximum pack file size packs.maxpackfilecount specifies the maximum number of packs in the shared cache (trees only for now) remotefilelog.backgroundprefetch runs prefetch in background when True remotefilelog.bgprefetchrevs specifies revisions to fetch on commit and update, and on other commands that use them. Different from pullprefetch. remotefilelog.gcrepack does garbage collection during repack when True remotefilelog.nodettl specifies maximum TTL of a node in seconds before it is garbage collected remotefilelog.repackonhggc runs repack on hg gc when True remotefilelog.prefetchdays specifies the maximum age of a commit in days after which it is no longer prefetched. remotefilelog.prefetchdelay specifies delay between background prefetches in seconds after operations that change the working copy parent remotefilelog.data.gencountlimit constraints the minimum number of data pack files required to be considered part of a generation. In particular, minimum number of packs files > gencountlimit. remotefilelog.data.generations list for specifying the lower bound of each generation of the data pack files. For example, list ['100MB','1MB'] or ['1MB', '100MB'] will lead to three generations: [0, 1MB), [ 1MB, 100MB) and [100MB, infinity). remotefilelog.data.maxrepackpacks the maximum number of pack files to include in an incremental data repack. remotefilelog.data.repackmaxpacksize the maximum size of a pack file for it to be considered for an incremental data repack. remotefilelog.data.repacksizelimit the maximum total size of pack files to include in an incremental data repack. remotefilelog.history.gencountlimit constraints the minimum number of history pack files required to be considered part of a generation. In particular, minimum number of packs files > gencountlimit. remotefilelog.history.generations list for specifying the lower bound of each generation of the history pack files. For example, list [ '100MB', '1MB'] or ['1MB', '100MB'] will lead to three generations: [ 0, 1MB), [1MB, 100MB) and [100MB, infinity). remotefilelog.history.maxrepackpacks the maximum number of pack files to include in an incremental history repack. remotefilelog.history.repackmaxpacksize the maximum size of a pack file for it to be considered for an incremental history repack. remotefilelog.history.repacksizelimit the maximum total size of pack files to include in an incremental history repack. remotefilelog.backgroundrepack automatically consolidate packs in the background remotefilelog.cachepath path to cache remotefilelog.cachegroup if set, make cache directory sgid to this group remotefilelog.cacheprocess binary to invoke for fetching file data remotefilelog.debug turn on remotefilelog-specific debug output remotefilelog.excludepattern pattern of files to exclude from pulls remotefilelog.includepattern pattern of files to include in pulls remotefilelog.fetchwarning: message to print when too many single-file fetches occur remotefilelog.getfilesstep number of files to request in a single RPC remotefilelog.getfilestype if set to 'threaded' use threads to fetch files, otherwise use optimistic fetching remotefilelog.pullprefetch revset for selecting files that should be eagerly downloaded rather than lazily remotefilelog.reponame name of the repo. If set, used to partition data from other repos in a shared store. remotefilelog.server if true, enable server-side functionality remotefilelog.servercachepath path for caching blobs on the server remotefilelog.serverexpiration number of days to keep cached server blobs remotefilelog.validatecache if set, check cache entries for corruption before returning blobs remotefilelog.validatecachelog if set, check cache entries for corruption before returning metadata Commands Repository maintenance prefetch prefetch file revisions from the server: hg prefetch [OPTIONS] [FILE...] Prefetchs file revisions for the specified revs and stores them in the local remotefilelog cache. If no rev is specified, the default rev is used which is the union of dot, draft, pullprefetch and bgprefetchrev. File names or patterns can be used to limit which files are downloaded. Return 0 on success. Options: -r,--rev <REV[+]> prefetch the specified revisions --repack run repack after prefetch -b,--base <VALUE> rev that is assumed to already be local -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns [+] marked option can be specified multiple times Uncategorized commands gc garbage collect the client and server filelog caches: hg gc [REPO...] garbage collect the client and server filelog caches repack hg repack [OPTIONS] Options: --background run in a background process --incremental do an incremental repack --packsonly only repack packs (skip loose objects) verifyremotefilelog hg verifyremotefilelogs <directory> Options: -d, --decompress decompress the filelogs first remotenames showing remotebookmarks and remotebranches in UI (EXPERIMENTAL) By default both remotebookmarks and remotebranches are turned on. Config knob to control the individually are as follows. Config options to tweak the default behaviour: remotenames.bookmarks Boolean value to enable or disable showing of remotebookmarks (default: True) remotenames.branches Boolean value to enable or disable showing of remotebranches (default: True) remotenames.hoistedpeer Name of the peer whose remotebookmarks should be hoisted into the top-level namespace (default: 'default') schemes extend schemes with shortcuts to repository swarms This extension allows you to specify shortcuts for parent URLs with a lot of repositories to act like a scheme, for example: [schemes] py = http://code.python.org/hg/ After that you can use it like: hg clone py://trunk/ Additionally there is support for some more complex schemas, for example used by Google Code: [schemes] gcode = http://{1}.googlecode.com/hg/ The syntax is taken from Mercurial templates, and you have unlimited number of variables, starting with {1} and continuing with {2}, {3} and so on. This variables will receive parts of URL supplied, split by /. Anything not specified as {part} will be just appended to an URL. For convenience, the extension adds these schemes by default: [schemes] py = http://hg.python.org/ bb = https://bitbucket.org/ bb+ssh = ssh://hg AT bitbucket.org/ gcode = https://{1}.googlecode.com/hg/ kiln = https://{1}.kilnhg.com/Repo/ You can override a predefined scheme by defining a new scheme with the same name. Commands Uncategorized commands share share a common history between several working directories The share extension introduces a new command hg share to create a new working directory. This is similar to hg clone, but doesn't involve copying or linking the storage of the repository. This allows working on different branches or changes in parallel without the associated cost in terms of disk space. Note: destructive operations or extensions like hg rollback should be used with care as they can result in confusing problems. Automatic Pooled Storage for Clones When this extension is active, hg clone can be configured to automatically share/pool storage across multiple clones. This mode effectively converts hg clone to hg clone + hg share. The benefit of using this mode is the automatic management of store paths and intelligent pooling of related repositories. The following share. config options influence this feature: share.pool Filesystem path where shared repository data will be stored. When defined, hg clone will automatically use shared repository storage instead of creating a store inside each clone. share.poolnaming How directory names in share.pool are constructed. "identity" means the name is derived from the first changeset in the repository. In this mode, different remotes share storage if their root/initial changeset is identi‐ cal. In this mode, the local shared repository is an aggregate of all encountered re‐ mote repositories. "remote" means the name is derived from the source repository's path or URL. In this mode, storage is only shared if the path or URL requested in the hg clone command matches exactly to a repository that was cloned before. The default naming mode is "identity". Sharing requirements and configs of source repository with shares: By default creating a shared repository only enables sharing a common history and does not share requirements and configs between them. This may lead to problems in some cases, for ex‐ ample when you upgrade the storage format from one repository but does not set related con‐ figs in the shares. Setting format.exp-share-safe = True enables sharing configs and requirements. This only ap‐ plies to shares which are done after enabling the config option. For enabling this in existing shares, enable the config option and reshare. For resharing existing shares, make sure your working directory is clean and there are no un‐ tracked files, delete that share and create a new share. Commands Repository creation share create a new shared repository: hg share [-U] [-B] SOURCE [DEST] Initialize a new repository and working directory that shares its history (and optionally bookmarks) with another repository. Note using rollback or extensions that destroy/modify history (mq, rebase, etc.) can cause considerable confusion with shared clones. In particular, if two shared clones are both updated to the same changeset, and one of them destroys that changeset with roll‐ back, the other clone will suddenly stop working: all operations will fail with "abort: working directory has unknown parent". The only known workaround is to use de‐ bugsetparents on the broken clone to reset it to a changeset that still exists. Options: -U, --noupdate do not create a working directory -B, --bookmarks also share bookmarks --relative point to source using a relative path Repository maintenance unshare convert a shared repository to a normal one: hg unshare Copy the store data to the repo and remove the sharedpath data. show unified command to show various repository information (EXPERIMENTAL) This extension provides the hg show command, which provides a central command for displaying commonly-accessed repository data and views of that data. The following config options can influence operation. commands show.aliasprefix List of strings that will register aliases for views. e.g. s will effectively set con‐ fig options alias.s<view> = show <view> for all views. i.e. hg swork would execute hg show work. Aliases that would conflict with existing registrations will not be performed. Commands Change navigation show show various repository information: hg show VIEW A requested view of repository data is displayed. If no view is requested, the list of available views is shown and the command aborts. Note There are no backwards compatibility guarantees for the output of this command. Output may change in any future Mercurial release. Consumers wanting stable command output should specify a template via -T/--template. List of available views: bookmarks bookmarks and their associated changeset stack current line of work work changesets that aren't finished Options: -T,--template <TEMPLATE> display with template sparse allow sparse checkouts of the working directory (EXPERIMENTAL) (This extension is not yet protected by backwards compatibility guarantees. Any aspect may break in future releases until this notice is removed.) This extension allows the working directory to only consist of a subset of files for the re‐ vision. This allows specific files or directories to be explicitly included or excluded. Many repository operations have performance proportional to the number of files in the working di‐ rectory. So only realizing a subset of files in the working directory can improve perfor‐ mance. Sparse Config Files The set of files that are part of a sparse checkout are defined by a sparse config file. The file defines 3 things: includes (files to include in the sparse checkout), excludes (files to exclude from the sparse checkout), and profiles (links to other config files). The file format is newline delimited. Empty lines and lines beginning with # are ignored. Lines beginning with %include `` denote another sparse config file to include. e.g. ``%in‐‐ clude tests.sparse. The filename is relative to the repository root. The special lines [include] and [exclude] denote the section for includes and excludes that follow, respectively. It is illegal to have [include] after [exclude]. Non-special lines resemble file patterns to be added to either includes or excludes. The syn‐ tax of these lines is documented by hg help patterns. Patterns are interpreted as glob: by default and match against the root of the repository. Exclusion patterns take precedence over inclusion patterns. So even if a file is explicitly included, an [exclude] entry can remove it. For example, say you have a repository with 3 directories, frontend/, backend/, and tools/. frontend/ and backend/ correspond to different projects and it is uncommon for someone work‐ ing on one to need the files for the other. But tools/ contains files shared between both projects. Your sparse config files may resemble: # frontend.sparse frontend/** tools/** # backend.sparse backend/** tools/** Say the backend grows in size. Or there's a directory with thousands of files you wish to ex‐ clude. You can modify the profile to exclude certain files: [include] backend/** tools/** [exclude] tools/tests/** Commands Uncategorized commands split command to split a changeset into smaller ones (EXPERIMENTAL) Commands Change manipulation split split a changeset into smaller ones: hg split [--no-rebase] [[-r] REV] Repeatedly prompt changes and commit message for new changesets until there is nothing left in the original changeset. If --rev was not given, split the working directory parent. By default, rebase connected non-obsoleted descendants onto the new changeset. Use --no-re‐ base to avoid the rebase. Options: -r,--rev <REV> revision to split --rebase rebase descendants after split (default: True) -d,--date <DATE> record the specified date as commit date -u,--user <USER> record the specified user as committer sqlitestore store repository data in SQLite (EXPERIMENTAL) The sqlitestore extension enables the storage of repository data in SQLite. This extension is HIGHLY EXPERIMENTAL. There are NO BACKWARDS COMPATIBILITY GUARANTEES. This means that repositories created with this extension may only be usable with the exact version of this extension/Mercurial that was used. The extension attempts to enforce this in order to prevent repository corruption. In addition, several features are not yet supported or have known bugs: • Only some data is stored in SQLite. Changeset, manifest, and other repository data is not yet stored in SQLite. • Transactions are not robust. If the process is aborted at the right time during transaction close/rollback, the repository could be in an inconsistent state. This problem will dimin‐ ish once all repository data is tracked by SQLite. • Bundle repositories do not work (the ability to use e.g. hg -R <bundle-file> log to auto‐ matically overlay a bundle on top of the existing repository). • Various other features don't work. This extension should work for basic clone/pull, update, and commit workflows. Some history rewriting operations may fail due to lack of support for bundle repositories. To use, activate the extension and set the storage.new-repo-backend config option to sqlite to enable new repositories to use SQLite for storage. strip strip changesets and their descendants from history (DEPRECATED) The functionality of this extension has been included in core Mercurial since version 5.7. Please use hg debugstrip ... instead. This extension allows you to strip changesets and all their descendants from the repository. See the command help for details. transplant command to transplant changesets from another branch This extension allows you to transplant changes to another parent revision, possibly in an‐ other repository. The transplant is done using 'diff' patches. Transplanted patches are recorded in .hg/transplant/transplants, as a map from a changeset hash to its hash in the source repository. Commands Change manipulation transplant transplant changesets from another branch: hg transplant [-s REPO] [-b BRANCH [-a]] [-p REV] [-m REV] [REV]... Selected changesets will be applied on top of the current working directory with the log of the original changeset. The changesets are copied and will thus appear twice in the history with different identities. Consider using the graft command if everything is inside the same repository - it will use merges and will usually give a better result. Use the rebase extension if the changesets are unpublished and you want to move them instead of copying them. If --log is specified, log messages will have a comment appended of the form: (transplanted from CHANGESETHASH) You can rewrite the changelog message with the --filter option. Its argument will be invoked with the current changelog message as $1 and the patch as $2. --source/-s specifies another repository to use for selecting changesets, just as if it tem‐ porarily had been pulled. If --branch/-b is specified, these revisions will be used as heads when deciding which changesets to transplant, just as if only these revisions had been pulled. If --all/-a is specified, all the revisions up to the heads specified with --branch will be transplanted. Example: • transplant all changes up to REV on top of your current revision: hg transplant --branch REV --all You can optionally mark selected transplanted changesets as merge changesets. You will not be prompted to transplant any ancestors of a merged transplant, and you can merge descendants of them normally instead of transplanting them. Merge changesets may be transplanted directly by specifying the proper parent changeset by calling hg transplant --parent. If no merges or revisions are provided, hg transplant will start an interactive changeset browser. If a changeset application fails, you can fix the merge by hand and then resume where you left off by calling hg transplant --continue/-c. Options: -s,--source <REPO> transplant changesets from REPO -b,--branch <REV[+]> use this source changeset as head -a, --all pull all changesets up to the --branch revisions -p,--prune <REV[+]> skip over REV -m,--merge <REV[+]> merge at REV --parent <REV> parent to choose when transplanting merge -e, --edit invoke editor on commit messages --log append transplant info to log message --stop stop interrupted transplant -c, --continue continue last transplant session after fixing conflicts --filter <CMD> filter changesets through command [+] marked option can be specified multiple times uncommit uncommit part or all of a local changeset (EXPERIMENTAL) This command undoes the effect of a local commit, returning the affected files to their un‐ committed state. This means that files modified, added or removed in the changeset will be left unchanged, and so will remain modified, added and removed in the working directory. Commands Change manipulation unamend undo the most recent amend operation on a current changeset: hg unamend This command will roll back to the previous version of a changeset, leaving working directory in state in which it was before running hg amend (e.g. files modified as part of an amend will be marked as modified hg status) uncommit uncommit part or all of a local changeset: hg uncommit [OPTION]... [FILE]... This command undoes the effect of a local commit, returning the affected files to their un‐ committed state. This means that files modified or deleted in the changeset will be left un‐ changed, and so will remain modified in the working directory. If no files are specified, the commit will be pruned, unless --keep is given. Options: --keep allow an empty commit after uncommitting --allow-dirty-working-copy allow uncommit with outstanding changes -n,--note <TEXT> store a note on uncommit -I,--include <PATTERN[+]> include names matching the given patterns -X,--exclude <PATTERN[+]> exclude names matching the given patterns -m,--message <TEXT> use text as commit message -l,--logfile <FILE> read commit message from file -d,--date <DATE> record the specified date as commit date -u,--user <USER> record the specified user as committer -D, --currentdate record the current date as commit date -U, --currentuser record the current user as committer [+] marked option can be specified multiple times win32mbcs allow the use of MBCS paths with problematic encodings Some MBCS encodings are not good for some path operations (i.e. splitting path, case conver‐ sion, etc.) with its encoded bytes. We call such a encoding (i.e. shift_jis and big5) as "problematic encoding". This extension can be used to fix the issue with those encodings by wrapping some functions to convert to Unicode string before path operation. This extension is useful for: • Japanese Windows users using shift_jis encoding. • Chinese Windows users using big5 encoding. • All users who use a repository with one of problematic encodings on case-insensitive file system. This extension is not needed for: • Any user who use only ASCII chars in path. • Any user who do not use any of problematic encodings. Note that there are some limitations on using this extension: • You should use single encoding in one repository. • If the repository path ends with 0x5c, .hg/hgrc cannot be read. • win32mbcs is not compatible with fixutf8 extension. By default, win32mbcs uses encoding.encoding decided by Mercurial. You can specify the en‐ coding by config option: [win32mbcs] encoding = sjis It is useful for the users who want to commit with UTF-8 log message. win32text perform automatic newline conversion (DEPRECATED) Deprecation: The win32text extension requires each user to configure the extension again and again for each clone since the configuration is not copied when cloning. We have therefore made the eol as an alternative. The eol uses a version controlled file for its configuration and each clone will therefore use the right settings from the start. To perform automatic newline conversion, use: [extensions] win32text = [encode] ** = cleverencode: # or ** = macencode: [decode] ** = cleverdecode: # or ** = macdecode: If not doing conversion, to make sure you do not commit CRLF/CR by accident: [hooks] pretxncommit.crlf = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcrlf # or pretxncommit.cr = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcr To do the same check on a server to prevent CRLF/CR from being pushed or pulled: [hooks] pretxnchangegroup.crlf = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcrlf # or pretxnchangegroup.cr = python:hgext.win32text.forbidcr zeroconf discover and advertise repositories on the local network The zeroconf extension will advertise hg serve instances over DNS-SD so that they can be dis‐ covered using the hg paths command without knowing the server's IP address. To allow other people to discover your repository using run hg serve in your repository: $ cd test $ hg serve You can discover Zeroconf-enabled repositories by running hg paths: $ hg paths zc-test = http://example.com:8000/test FILES /etc/mercurial/hgrc, $HOME/.hgrc, .hg/hgrc This file contains defaults and configuration. Values in .hg/hgrc override those in $HOME/.hgrc, and these override settings made in the global /etc/mercurial/hgrc con‐ figuration. See hgrc(5) for details of the contents and format of these files. .hgignore This file contains regular expressions (one per line) that describe file names that should be ignored by hg. For details, see hgignore(5). .hgsub This file defines the locations of all subrepositories, and tells where the subreposi‐ tory checkouts came from. For details, see hg help subrepos. .hgsubstate This file is where Mercurial stores all nested repository states. NB: This file should not be edited manually. .hgtags This file contains changeset hash values and text tag names (one of each separated by spaces) that correspond to tagged versions of the repository contents. The file con‐ tent is encoded using UTF-8. .hg/last-message.txt This file is used by hg commit to store a backup of the commit message in case the commit fails. .hg/localtags This file can be used to define local tags which are not shared among repositories. The file format is the same as for .hgtags, but it is encoded using the local system encoding. Some commands (e.g. revert) produce backup files ending in .orig, if the .orig file already exists and is not tracked by Mercurial, it will be overwritten. BUGS Probably lots, please post them to the mailing list (see Resources below) when you find them. SEE ALSO hgignore(5), hgrc(5) AUTHOR Written by Olivia Mackall <olivia AT selenic.com> RESOURCES Main Web Site: https://mercurial-scm.org/ Source code repository: https://www.mercurial-scm.org/repo/hg Mailing list: https://www.mercurial-scm.org/mailman/listinfo/mercurial/ COPYING Copyright (C) 2005-2022 Olivia Mackall. Free use of this software is granted under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 or any later version. AUTHOR Olivia Mackall <olivia AT selenic.com> Organization: Mercurial HG(1)
Generated by phpMan Author: Che Dong Under GNU General Public License - MarkDown | JSON | MCP
2026-05-30 01:19 @216.73.216.79 CrawledBy Mozilla/5.0 AppleWebKit/537.36 (KHTML, like Gecko; compatible; ClaudeBot/1.0; +claudebot@anthropic.com)